Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 5626 - Contract - Wardroup & Associates Inc - Citibus Facility Renovation - 09_11_1997Resolution Item #34 September RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: No. 5626 11, 1997 THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract, attached herewith, by and between the City of Lubbock and Wardroup & Associates, Inc., of Lubbock, Texas, to install and furnish all materials and services as bid for the Citibus Facility Renovation, and any associated documents, which Contract shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this ATTEST: / W�"L Kayt e arnell, City Secretary Ili APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: llth day of September Victor Kilman, Purchasing M n ge j APPROVED AS TO FORM: b6faa—ld G. Vandiver, First Assistant City Attorney daIccdocs:wardroup res September 2. 1997 ALEX "TY" OOKE MAYOR PRO TEM CHANGE ORDER AIA DOCUMENT G701 OWNER ❑ ARCHITECT ❑ CONSULTANT ❑ FIELD ❑ OTHER ❑ RESOLUTION NO. 5626 Sep 11, 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. 612 Broadway Lubbock, Texas 79401 806-749-1 153 806-749-1866 fax PROJECT: BID #97158 - Citibus Facility Renovation CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: ONE TO CONTRACTOR: Wardroup & Associates, Inc. DATE: October 21, 1997 4408 Brownfield Drive Lubbock, Texas 79410 CONTRACT DATE: October 21, 1997 CONTRACT FOR: Lump Sum The Contract is changed as follows: Scope of work to be increased to include all material, labor, and permits required to complete work shown on drawings prepared by Stephen L. Faulk, Architect and dated 8-10-97. Generally, the work is to renovate the existing Dispatch Office and adjacent storage room into a smaller Dispatch Office and an additional office to the north. Work includes removal of designated millwork, door, door frame, electric control boxes. The installation of new doors and frames, new glazed hollow metal frames, new room finishes, modification of some existing millwork, and general accessories to complete the work. A quote was prepared by Wardroup & Associates, Inc October 15, 1997 to complete this additional work for the additional amount of $18,454.00. This additional work to be completed within an additional 21 days. A copy of the quote is attached to this Change Order. Not valid until signed by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. The original Contract Sum was ............................................................................................................... 101,797.00 Net change by previously authorized Change Orders ............................................................................................................... 0.00 The Contract Sum prior to this Change Order was ............................................................................................................... 101,797.00 The Contract Sum will be increased 18% by this Change Order; amount of .................................................................... 18,454.00 The new Contract Sum including this Change Order will be ............................................................................................................... 120,251.00 The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is March 24, 1998. ARCHITECT: CONTRACTOR: OWNER: Green Har ey Architects, I c Wardroup & Associates, Inc City of Lubbock Citibu BY- BY �_✓ DATE: lC7r?2 DATE: / /�J % DATE: City Manager Attorney G7ni-19s7 J Page No. of Pages. WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. 115 9 General Contractors 4408 Brownfield Drive PROPOSAL LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79410 (806) 795-8032 PHONE DATE TO CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS JOB NAME I LOCATION PURCHASING DEPARTMENT % GREEN HARVEY ARCHITECTS CITIBUS CHANGE ORDER LUBBOCK, TEXAS ADDITION TO FACILITY RENOVATION JOB NUMBER JOB PHONE 97158 We hereby submit specifications and estimates for: CHANGE ORDER PLANS BY STEPHEN L . FAULK : WE GIVE THE FOLLOWING BREAKDOWN: DEMOLITION 460.00 CARPENTRY & RELATED 2900.00 DRYWALL & ACOUSTICAL 770.00 DOORS, HM & HARDWARE 2225.00 MILLWORK 1725.00* GLASS & GLAZING 300.00 MECHANICAL 2220.00 ELWCTRICAL 2840.00* PAINTING 1020.00* FLOORING 297.00 LABOR MARK—UP 1530.00 16287.00 OVERHEAD & PROFIT 1629.00 TOTAL COST $17916.00 BOND AND BR INS. 538.00 SUGGESTED CHANGE AMOUNT $18454.00 THIS PRICE IS BASED UPON DOING THIS WORK WITH THE BALANCE OF THE PROJECT. APPROXIMATELY 21 DAYS SHOUD BE ADDED FOR THIS ADDITIONAL WORK. ALL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT REMAIN THE SAME. We PrmplD5tP hereby to furnish material and labor — complete in accordance with the above specifications, for the sum of: FIFTY—FOURlll THOUSAND FOUR UUNDR-ED dollars (S38 454 ). no Payment to be made as follows: All material is guaranteed to be as specified. All work to be completed In a professional manner according to standard practices. Any alteration or deviation from above soecitica- Authorize lions Involving extra costs will be executed only upon written orders, and will become an Sicnature extra charge over and above the estimate. All agreements contingent upon strikes. accidents W.C. WARDROUP, VP or delays beyond our control. Owner to carry fire. tornado and other necessary insurance. Note: This proposal may be Our workers are fully covered by Worker's Compensation Insurance. •.vahnrawn by us if not accepted nith n 30 days. �' ccepQ.au"lice of Proposal — The above prices, specifications and conditions are satisfactory and are hereby accepted. You are authorized Slgnatur _ to do the work as specified. Payment will be made as outlined above. slonatu`� Date of Acceptance: I V CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION BID #97158 I ff I y H O z Ln rn N CT cn 10 CITY OF LUBBOCKrt Lubbock, Texas r ITB #97158, Addendum #1 City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (BOB) 7B7-3000 ADDENDUM V ITB #97158 Citibus Facility Renovation MAILED TO VENDOR:.. CLOSE DATE: August 4, 1997 August 12, 1997 @ 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Delete Section 10675, Metal Storage Shelving. 2. Please submit your bid on the enclosed revised Bid Submittal form. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Questions may be faxed to or Email to: Laura Ritchie, Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806)767-2164 LRitchie@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, / 9 U& Lau a Ritchie Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID 97158ad1.doc BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: BID #97158 - CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. Demolition of existing partitions, doors, carpet, electrical, and plumbing. Installation of new partitions, doors, electrical, carpet, HVAC, finishes and all related work. MATERIALS: ($ ) SERVICES: ($ ) TOTAL BASE BID: ($ ) ALTERNATE #1 (ADD) Prepare and paint all exterior painted surfaces a selected color for the lump sum of: MATERIALS: ($ } SERVICES: ($ } TOTAL ALTERNATE #1 (ADD): ($ } (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 134 (ONE HUNDRED THIRTY-FOUR) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ J or a Bid Bond in the sum of Dollars which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Authorized Signature (Printed or Typed Name) Company Address City, County State Zip Code Telephone: Fax: (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 97158 PROJECT NUMBER: 4511.9222 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS 11. SPECIAL CONDITION NOTICE TO BIDDERS NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #97158 Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 3:00 o'clock p.m. on the 12th day of August, 1997, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION " After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 28th day of August, 1997, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on 31st day of July, 1997, at 11:00 o'clock a.m., in the Citibus Conference Room, Lubbock, Texas Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann, Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 767-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. qZ�l CITYOF LU B K VICTOR KILMA PURCHASING MANAGER Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806)767-2167/Fax (806)767-2164. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION-. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4, BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: LAURA RITCHIE BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806)767-2164 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 134 (ONE HUNDRED THIRTY-FOUR) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. 8. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 9. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished two sets of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will fumish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 15. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 16, CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 17. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and cant' at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured. A Worker's Compensation Coverage statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted will be accepted as an alternative. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 21, PREPARATION FOR BID The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. M General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is property qualified to cant' out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: 1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. 2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. 3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. 4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. BID SUBMITTAL BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: LUBBOCK, TEXAS DATE: 12 AUGUST 1997 PROJECT NUMBER: BID #97158 - CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION Bid of (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a C'TTTRus RRNnVATTnT\T having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. Demolition of existing partitions, doors, carpet, electrical, and plumbing. Installation of new partitions, doors, electrical, carpet, HVAC, finishes and all related work. MATERIALS: FORTY THOUSAND AND NO/100------------------- ($ 40, 000. 00 FIFTY—THREE THOUSAND SERVICES: 4� =Tl tli,I�AND NiAig=, fiFSyuPt Apip Pde//1QA ($ 53.597.00 ) NINETY THREE THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED AND TOTAL BASE BIu^� — ------ ($ 93 , 597. 00 ) ALTERNATE #1 (ADD) Prepare and paint all exterior painted surfaces a selected color for the lump sum of: MATERIALS: TWO THOUSAND AND NO/100------------------ ($ 2000.00 ) SERVICES: SIXTY—TWO HUNDRED AND NO/100-------------($ 6200.00 ) TOTAL ALTERNATE#1 (ADD): EIGHTY—TWO HUNDRED AND NO/100--- ($ 8200.00 ) (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 134 (ONE HUNDRED THIRTY-FOUR) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashiers Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ J or Bid Bond in the sum of TWFT.VF TunTTQAmn rTjjp HLTND Dollars ($ which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acre ante of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder sh II be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to i ors. DRMUT�q w_ WARnR (Printed or Typed Name) WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. Company 4408 BROWNFILED DRIVE Address LUBBOCK , T,TTRRnCK City, TEXAS County 7A41n State , Zip Code Telephone: 806 795-8032 Fax: g06 - 7aB-2nr;5 (Seal if Bidder is a ATTEST: Secretary WALLACE C . WARDROUP 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. N "'K1� p r.,Up 3 �p.1R5 �1RAC?Og0b.795.8032 �Sleid Drive 79410 �,� Brow, CK, i-II A.= LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No 4{ ❑ MILLER PLUMBING Q ❑ ,TQ 'NTP.R PT.P('TPT(' Q Q ❑ ❑ LUBBOCK GLASS & MIRROR ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ ❑ Bond No. TX 6941375 00 UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA Houston. Texas BID BOND KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. (herd m.ert luit Larne : *4 d m—. c•, •-rya: i,M so c4r.1, wtc+ as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and Universal Surety of America, ;8,2 Durham., Houston, Texas, as Surety. hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound urito CITY OF LUBBOCK !Nero rxrt %11 ram- a'0 409•-yft w l';d' bin 01': o+l•el as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, ir! the SLIM of FIVE o,, of ,he amour, of ihli bid not to exceed TWELVE THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED AND NOJ100------------------- Dollars (5------5%---1. fo: the t..�yment ct which sum well and truly t be Wads, the sand Fr,nc;pat and the said Surety. bind :iurse;ves. your heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents WHEREAS, the principal has submitted a bid for CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATIONS IMrre •nvt-. toll came, .COr%: an0 ;q ::%tirr. et D•c=ect'. BID NO. 97158 NOW. THEREFORE. If th2 contract be timely awarded to the Principal a:,d the Principal shai, within such a spec:`ia: in the bid. enter ir•to a contract in writing and give bond with good and sutficierr suroty, or, ir. the t��ni ;,' tho faaure of the Principal to enter into such Contra and give such bond or bonds. if :he Prircipa; snarl pay ;a Vie Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specitie' Ir::a:•: bid anc such larger amours: forwhicn me Obligee rnay in good faith contract with another party to pertor:r, the -work. cOverec by saic Did. then. :his obligation snail be nuil and void, otherwise to remain in full force and e`fect. PROVIDED. HOVE EP,, neither Principal nor Surety shell be b jnd her8under unless Obligee prior ;c. execut:on of the final contract shall furnish evidence of financing in a manner anti form acceptable x) Principa! and Surety that financing has beer: firmly committed to cover the entire cost of the proiect. Signed and sealed this 12TH day of AUGUST (Pnnci By. t9 97 • WARDROUP & AS-S GATES , INC. VACS 0. WARDROUP p VICE PRU Title °.• UNXJ.D Y OF ER A By• �' KE (A tome, -in -fact) (Seal) UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA P.O. BOX 1068 -Houston, Texas 77251-1068 GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY - CERTIFIED COPY Agemy Inrmmatim GPA# 3001193 TX 6941375 00 Howard Cowan Enterprises, Inc. Know All Men by These Presents, That UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, and having its pricipal office in Houston, Texas, does by these presents make, constitute and appoint Marla Hill Howard Cowan Kevin J. Dunn of Lubbock and State of Texas its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver Bonds not to exceed $1,000,000.00 unless such is accompanied by letter of authority signed by the President, Secretary or Executive Vice President of Universal Surety of America. and to bind the Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attomey(s)-in-Fact may do within the stated limitations, and such authority is to continue in force until 6/30/1998 . Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of Universal Surety of America at a meeting held on the 11 th day of July, 1994. "Be It Resolved, that the President, and any Vice President, Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company." "RESOLVED that the signature of any officer of the corporation, and the seal of the corporation may be affixed or printed by facsimilie to any power of attorney of the corporation, and that such printed facsimilie signature and seal shall be valid and binding upon the corporation." In Witness Whereof, Universal Surety of America has caused these presents to be signed by its President, John Knox, Jr. and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 30th day of September, A.D.,1996. UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA -Q. rwa State of Texas - a = B4 ss: ian County of Harris •,; Jo nox,Jr. President �,, •• On this 30th day of September, in the year 1996, before me, Rhonda Kay Wilke, a notary public, personally appeared John Knox, Jr., personally known to me to be the person who executed the within instrument as President , on behalf of the corporation herein named and acknowledged to me that the corporation executed it. cur � N . Notary Public I, the undersigned Secretary of Universal Surety of America, hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Original Power of Attorney issued by said Company, and do hereby further certify that the said Power of Attorney is still in effect. GIVEN under my hand and the seal of said company, at Houston, Texas, this 12TH day of AUGUST 19 97. Vp As start Secretary Any instrument issued in excess of the penalty stated above is totally void and without any validity. For verification of the authority of this power you may telephone (713) 722-4600. 1351-1400/050 TTB #R97158, Addendum #1 City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 7J457 (BOB) 767-3000 ADDENDUM #1 ITB #97158 Citibus Facility Renovation MAILED TO VENDOR: CLOSE DATE: August 4, 1997 August 12, 1997 @ 3:00 p.m. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Delete Section 10675, Metal Storage Shelving. 2. Please submit your bid on the enclosed revised Bid Submittal form. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Questions may be faxed to or Email to: Laura Ritchie, Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806)767-2164 LRitchie@maii.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, 4LauFR;��itchie Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID p,55oC.tA'1 �S. 1tti V � rJA�D�oup & TO'C'%CR9 ��� 906•105. 01Z ,445 $rdylh{ieti� tIi)u _J 79a1C) ,"%ra s�xc. A.b"- X 5 D.W'.�N�U W C.gib' FILE 97158ad1.doc PERFORMANCE BOND BOND CHECK BEST RAIN, LICENS _C, NITEXAS DATEk...�' [j j A BOND NO. TX 6941383 00 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that INC. (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of ONE HUNDRED ONE THOUSAND SEVEN Dollars ($101, 797.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the paym o , i i n u -bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 11TIbay of SEPTEMBER , 1997, to BID #97158 — CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 1TH day of SEPTE_MBER , 1997 UNIVERSAL TY OF IC, WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. Surety t,,; Principal By: ,, J� By: itle) HOWARD COW (Title) ATTORNEY —IN —FACT By: (Title) By: (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates HOWARD COWAN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. UNIGMRSh; M RETY OF Ai�i ICA Surety *By:: -(T' e) HOWARD COWAN� ATTORNEY -IN -FACT Approved as to Form City bock B By: AMA ttomey * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. PAYMENT BOND "" r,HECK BEST RATING, LICENIIED IN TEXAS 6AT*JJ BY BOND NO. TX 6941383 00 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA (hereinafter called the Suretyts), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of 0 HUNDRED ONE THOUSAND SEVEN Dollars ($101, 797.00) lawful money of the United States for the paym i i n mind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 11TH day of SEPTEMBER , 19 97 , to BID #97158 - CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 16TH day of SEPTEMBER 19 97 . UNIVERSAL SLTDL'TY OF V13ICA Surety "By:. . itle) HOWARD CbWAN ATTORNEY -IN -FACT WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. Principal By: (Title) By: (Title) By: (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates HOWARD COWAN I an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. UNIVERSAL SU TY OF _A_MERT-L-;A Surety *By: (Title) HOWARD COWAN ATTORNEY--IN—FACT Approved as to form: City of Lubbock -by: 14 TC it Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA P.O. BOX 1068 -Houston, Texas 77251-1068 GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY - CERTIFIED COPY Ageocy Wormwon GPA# 3001193 TX 6941383 00 Howard Cowan Enterprises, Inc. Know All Men by These Presents, That UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas, and having its pricipal office in Houston, Texas, does by these presents make, constitute and appoint Marla Hill Howard Cowan Kevin J. Dunn of Lubbock and State of Texas its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver Bonds not to exceed $1,000,000.00 unless such is accompanied by letter of authority signed by the President, Secretary or Executive Vice President of Universal Surety of America. and to bind the Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attomey(s)-in-Fact may do within the stated limitations, and such authority is to continue in force until 6/30/1998 . Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of Universal Surety of America at a meeting held on the 1 Ith day of July,1984. "Be It Resolved, that the President, and any Vice President, Secretary or any Assistant Secretary shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attomey(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company." "RESOLVED that the signature of any officer of the corporation, and the seal of the corporation may be affixed or printed by facsimilie to any power of attorney of the corporation, and that such printed facsimilie signature and seal shall be valid and binding upon the corporation." In Witness Whereof, Universal Surety of America has caused these presents to be signed by its President, John Knox, Jr. and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 30th day of September, A.D.,1996. e/ p/il"W RE1r�'�'•� State of Texas- iiu •+:�; ss: County of Harris Mq�ipl UNIVERSAL SURETY OF AMERICA r55x, Jr. IV President On this 30th day of September, in the year 1996, before me, Rhonda Kay Wilke, a notary public, personally appeared John Knox, Jr., personally known to me to be the person who executed the within instrument as President , on behalf of the corporation herein named and acknowledged to me that the corporation executed It. cur � WL1C�t� ' Notary Public I, the undersigned Secretary of Universal Surety of America, hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a full, true and correct copy of the Original Power of Attorney issued by said Company, and do hereby further certify that the said Power of Attorney is still in effect. GIVEN under my hand and the seal of said company, at Houston, Texas, this 16 TH day of SEPTEMBER 19 97 . Any instrtunent issued in excess of the penalty stated above is totally void and without any validity. Ds:, ��nt Secretary For verification of the authority of this power you may telephone (713) 722-4600. 1351-1400/050 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE A0,01M. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DATE(MWDD/YY) 03/12/97 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION The I nWest Group, Inc.NLY P + c. AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 110 N . Ma r i en f e l d , Ste 330 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Midland, Texas 797� 1 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A Mid -Continent Casualty Co. INSURED COMPANY WARDROUP R. ASSOCIATES, INC. B Texas Workers Comp Ins Fund COMPANY P. 0. BOX 6999 Lubbock: TX 79493 C Albany Ins. Company COMPANY D COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MWDD/YY) POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MWDD/YY) LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE S 20000001 A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CGL223188 10/01/96 10/01/97 PRODUCTS - COMP/OPAGG S 20(:)(_)0o0 CLAIMS MADE OCCUR PERSONAL SADVINJURY S 1006065 OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT EACH OCCURRENCE $ FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) S 5()()00 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5000 A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANYAUTO 06-TX-5445-3 i(=)/ol/96 10/01/97 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT S 1()()()000 X ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ X BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ HIRED AUTOS NON OWNED AUTOS �( PROPERTY DAMAGE S GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT S ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT $ AGGREGATE S EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $ OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM S WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X I STATUTORY LIMITS B EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY TSF1o418504 10/03/96 10/03/97 EACH ACCIDENT $ 50000 ) DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 500000 THE PROPRIETOR/ INCL PARTNERS/EXECUTIVE OFFICERS ARE: EXCL DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE S 500000. OTHER C 8S22317-96* 10/01/96 10/01/97 BUILDERS R I S N:: $640 , i)(; 0 PER JOB DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #97158 - CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION. 4DDITION INSURED AND WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK EXCEPT WORKER'S COMPENSATION CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION CITY OF LUBBOCK P. 0. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 1 S.L DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AP1jNTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIV t 11 ACORD 25-S (3/93) © AI°OR �f ORATION 1993 A 0 110 . CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DATE(MWDD/YY) 9 17 97 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION THE INWEST GROUP INC. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 110 N. MARIENFELD ST. , SUITE 330 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. MIDLAND, TEXAS 79701 COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE COMPANY A MID-CONTINENT CASUALTY CO. COMPANY IINSURED WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES, INC. B COMPANY P. 0. BOX 6999 TEXAS 79493 COMPANY ' ILUBBOCK, D COVERAGES THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. CO LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MM/DD/YY) POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MM/DD/YY) LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY GENERAL AGGREGATE S 1000000 A COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE ❑ OCCUR FORTHCOMING 9 / 17 / 9 7 9 / 17 / 98 PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG S PERSONAL & ADV INJURY IS k EACH OCCURRENCE S 1000000 OWNER'S & CONTRACTOR'S PROT FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) Is MED EXP (Any one person) I S AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT S ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per person) S HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE S GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY • EA ACCIDENT IS ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACH ACCIDENT I $ AGGREGATEIS EXCESS LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE S OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM S WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY STATUTORY LIMITS EACH ACCIDENT S t THE PROPRIETOR/ INCL PARTNERS/EXECUTIVE DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT S DISEASE -EACH EMPLOYEE S OFFICERS ARE. EXCL OTHER NAMED INSURED: CI OF LUBBOCK P.I. BOX 2000 LUB OCK, TEXAS 79457 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/SPECIAL ITEMS RE: CITY OF LUBBOCK - BID #97158 - CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE CITY OF LUBBOCK EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL P . 0. BOX 2000 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79457 BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH ZW7E 3bALL IMPOSENO OBLIG ION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE C P Y. ITS NTS REPRES NTA S. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE v' ACORD 25-S (3/93) © ACORD CORPORATION 1993 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT II To Be Completed by Appropriate Insurance Agent/Broker I Prior to Award of Contract I, the undersigned Agent/Broker, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor is awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. Agent (Signature) Agent (Print) Name of Agent/Broker: Address of Agent/Broker: City/State/Zip: Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( ) Date: CONTRACTOR'S NAME: (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: NOTE TO AGENT/BROKER If this time requirement is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806)767-2165. BID #97158 - CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractors current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE 'The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; L(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.❑ CONTRACT CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS CONTRACT, made and entered into this 11th day of September. 1997 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through Windy Sitton, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Wardroup & Associates, Inc. of the City of Lubbock. County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and Contracts hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #97158 - CITIBUS FACILITY RENOVATION - $101,797.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Contract in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. A AS TO CONTENT: JI Owner's Representative APP VED AS FOR ; i omey ATTEST: Corporate Secretary C UBBO , TEXAS WNER) MAYOR CONTRACTOR: WARDROUP S< ,AS,W A S, IN By: PRINTED NAME: TITLE: 1IfALLAM 0. RARDROUP, VICE PRES COMPLETE ADDRESS: Wardroup & Associates, Inc. 4408 Brownfield Drive Lubbock,Texas 79410 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to wit WARDROUP & ASSOCIATES. INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative. 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the wont Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract documents, including plans and specifications, were prepared, and JOHN WILSON, GENERAL MANAGER, who will inspect constructions; or to such other representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this Contract. Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Contract, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Contract, Special Conditions of the Contract (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owners Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor, T. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice. 8. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials fumished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owners Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be fumished with two copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work of the Contractor, 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall -be fumished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend his work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by him, his Subcontractors, or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Contract that the Owner's Representative shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives' estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract. The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Contract, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Contract and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his decision. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal Contract or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owners Representative shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative, 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owners Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owners Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractors expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the Contractors expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under this Contract to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owners Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractors expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) percent. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein below provided. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including attorney's fees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Contract, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of his subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted within ten days after being notified of such award. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured. A Worker's Compensation Coverage statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted will be accepted as an alternative. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $750,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $750,000.00 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Installation The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0.00% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $1,000,000.00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC- 82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the govemmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in 406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which fumishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the govemmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the contractors current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, forthe duration of the project; (b) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor. (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self - Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the govemmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date bome by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date bome by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (iv) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall fumish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal Contract with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the Owner of such infringement. 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners' Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this Contract. 34. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for payments or from final payment. It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract. 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. EXTENSION OF TIME The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for an extension of time, submitting therewith all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then consider such written request and respond to Contractor in writing granting or rejecting the request for an extension of time to complete the project. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be fumished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Contract, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the fumishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this Contract, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner -which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this Contract. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage due Contractor. 43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor. 44. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the Contract, and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this Contract, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 47. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor, (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. t8. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in wilting and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents. 49. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Contract, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten (10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Contract. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the 'jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners. 50. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's Representative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the attached bid, the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Contract, and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Contract. 51. BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 52. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 53. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 54. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractors work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 55. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS JUL-16-1997 10:43 WAGE & HOUR REGION 6 214 767 2730 P.02i05 General Decision Number TX970015 Superseded General Decision No. TX960015 State: TEXAS Construction Type: BUILDING County(ies): LUBBOCK BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include residential construction consisting of single family homes and apartments up ' to and including 4 stories). (Use current heavy & highway general wage determination for Paving & Utilities Incidental to Building Construction). Modification Number Publication Date 0 02/14/1997 TX970015 - 1 02/14/1997 JUL-16-1997 10:43 WAGE 8 HOUR REGION 6 214 767 2730 P.03/05 COUNTY(ies): LUBBOCK CARP1884A 07/01/1993 Rates Fringes CARPENTERS 12.50 2.73 MILLWRIGHTS 13.00 2.73 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO850A 05/30/1996 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIANS 14.60 3.20+3.25% ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0629A 06/01/1996 PLUMBERS: Rates Fringes Mechanical contracts over $150,000 15.70 2.88 Mechanical contracts $150,000 or less 10.50 1.59 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SFTX0669A 01/01/1995 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTERS 18.25 5.78 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUTX2048A 03/16/1992 Rates Fringes ACOUSTICAL CEILING AND DRYWALL MECHANICS 10.00 .25 BRICKLAYERS 11.74 GLAZIERS 9.50 LABORERS 5.95 LATHERS 11.17 MASON TENDERS 6.25 PAINTERS 10.50 PLASTERERS 11.17 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS: Backhoe 10.50 .42 ROOFERS 9.71 SHEET METAL WORKERS (Including duct work) 8.80 .69 ----------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for the craft performing operation to which ---------------------------------------------------------------- welding is incidental. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses TX970015 - 2 02/14/1997 J►JL-16-1997 10:43 WAGE & HOUR REGION 6 214 767 2730 P.04/05 (29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (v) ) . - In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under that identifier do not reflect collectively bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. other designations indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be prevailing. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting North a 1 position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling on survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional offices have responsibility for the Davis -Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) j and 3_) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U. S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N. W. Washington, D. C. 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N. W. Washington, D. C. 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment TX970015 -- 3 02/14/1997 JUL-16-199? 10:44 WAGE & HOUR REGION 6 214 ?6? 2?30 P.05i05 data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) if the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U. S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N. W. Washington, D. C. 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION TX970015 - 4 02/14/1997 TOTAL P.05 SPECIFICATIONS Facility Renovations FTA Boiler Plate Title VI City Transit Management Inc; d.b.a. Citibus FTA Requirements 06/03/97 FTA GUIDELINES AND REGULATIONS This project is in part funded by the Federal Transit Administration (FTA). FTA regulations require all grant recipients, contractors/subcontractors associated with projects funded in whole or in part to comply with all applicable FTA requirements and federal statutes/regulations including but not limited to the following: • Federal Transportation Administration Act of 1964, as amended, 49 U.S.C. 1601 • Surface Transportation Assistance Act of 1982, as amended. • Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. • 49 CFR Part 27 — Elderly and Handicapped • 41 CFR Section 101-19.6 —Accommodations for Physically Handicapped • 29 CFR Part 1926 — Safety Standards As per FTA guidelines, the following clauses/provisions shall be caused or required to be inserted in full by the contracting officer. LABOR PROVISIONS — CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS Minimum Wages a) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor tinder the Copeland Act), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at the time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section I (b) (2) of the Davis -Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a)(l)(IV) of 29 CFR 5.5; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR 5.5 (a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated a the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: provided, that the employer's payroll record accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of 29 CFR 5.5 and the Davis -Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by workers. Page i of 7 City Transit Management Inc; d.b.a. Citibus FTA Requirements 06/03/97 b) 1. The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (a) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (b) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (c) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. 2. If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington D.C. 20210. The Administrator or an authorized representative will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate ( including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. 4. The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (a)(1)(b) or (c) of 29 CFR 5.5, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. c) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. d) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. Page 2 of 7 City Transit Management Inc; d.b.a. Citibus FTA Requirements 06/03/97 2. Withholding DOT shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally -assisted contract subject to Davis -Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanics, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction of development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, DOT may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. 3. Payrolls and Basic Records a) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section 1 (b)(2)(b) of the Davis -Bacon Act, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5 (a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Section 1 (b)(2)(b) of the Davis -Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual costs incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. Reference attached Wage Scale for hourly rates. b) 1. The contractor shall submit weekly, for each week in which any contract work is performed, a copy of all payrolls to the grantee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 5.5 (a)(3) of regulations, 29 CFR Part 5. This information may be submitted in any form desired, optional form WH-347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal stock number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Governments Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Page 3 of 7 City Transit Management Inc; d.b.a. Citibus FTA Requirements 06/03/97 2. Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance", signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (a) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under Section 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of regulations, 29 CFR Part 5 and that such information is correct and complete. (b) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in regulations, 29 CFR Part 3. (c) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. 3. The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of optional form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(b) of 29 CFR Section 5.5 4. The falsification of any of the above certification may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 23 i of Title 31 of the United States Code. c) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(I) of 29 CFR Section 5.5 available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of DOT or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of nay further payment, advance or guarantee of fiends. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR Section 5.12. 4. Apprentices and Trainees a) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a state apprenticeship agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed by his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a state apprenticeship Page 4 of 7 City Transit Management Inc; d.b.a. Citibus FTA Requirements 06/03/97 agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratios of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rates specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman's hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the administrator determines that the different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringe benefits shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a state apprenticeship agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. b) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR Section 5,16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to an individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeyman on the site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman's hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman's wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the even the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of the training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. Page 5 of 7 City Transit Management Inc; d.b.a. Citibus FTA Requirements 06/03/97 c) Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. 5. Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 18 U.S.C. 874 and 29 CFR Part 3, which are incorporated by reference. This act provides that each contractor or subgrantee shall be prohibited from inducing, by any means any person employed in the construction, completion, or repair of public work, to give up any part of the compensation to which he is otherwise entitled. 6. Contract Termination: Debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR Section 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR Section 5.12. 7. Compliance with Davis -Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis -Bacon and related acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference. Disputes Concerning Labor Standards. Disputes arising out of the general dispute clause of this contract shall not be subject to the general dispute clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of it subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. 9. a) Certification of Eligibility. By entering into this contract the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded government contracts by virtue of Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR Section 5.12 (a)(1). b) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a government contract by virtue of Section 3 (a) of the Davis -Bacon Act or 29 CFR Section 5.12 (a)(1). c) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. Section 1001. 10. Overtime Requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any work week in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of eight hours in any calendar day or in excess of forty hours in such work week unless such laborer or mechanic received compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of eight hours in any calendar day or in excess of forty hours in such work week, whichever is greater. Page 6 of 7 City Transit Management Inc; d.b.a. Citibus FTA Requirements 06/03/97 11. Violation; Liability for Unpaid Wager; Liquidated Damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (b)(1) of 29 CFR Section 5.5, the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States ( in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such district or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (b)(l) or 29 CFR Section 5.5 in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of eight hours or in excess of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in subparagraph (b)(1) of 29 CFR Section 5.5. 12. Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages. DOT or the recipient shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, form any monies payable on account for work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally -assisted contract which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in subparagraph (b)(2) of 29 CFR Section 5.5. 13. Section 107 of C.W.H.S.S.A. is applicable to construction work and provides that no laborer or mechanic shall be requested to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health and safety as determined under construction, safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor. These requirements do not apply to the purchases of supplies or materials or articles ordinarily available on the open market, or contracts for transportation or transmission of intelligence. 14. Nonconstruction Grants. The contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen, working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Further, the recipient shall require the contracting officer to insert in any such contract a clause providing that the records to be maintained under this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of DOT and the Department of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. 15. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in subparagraph 1 through 15 of this paragraph and also a clause requiring the subcontractor to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subparagraphs 1 through 15 of this paragraph. Page 7 of 7 City Transit Management, Inc. d.b.a. Citibus Title VI 06/03/97 TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS ACT OF 1964 Title VI Compliance During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor"), agrees as follows: 1. Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in federally -assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT") Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. 2. Nondiscrimination: The contractor with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, religion, color, sex, age, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by section 21.5 of the regulation, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. 3. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurement of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations, either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurement of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, religion, color, sex, age, or national origin. 4. Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities, as may be determined by the City of Lubbock or the Federal Transit Administration (FTA) to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information is required or a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information , the contractor shall so certify to the City of Lubbock, or the Federal Transit, as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. 5. Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the City of Lubbock shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Transit Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to:. a. Withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or, b. Cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract in whole or in part. 6. Incorporation or Provisions: The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraph (1) through (6) of this section in every subcontract, including procurement of materials and leases of Page l of 5 City Transit Management, Inc. d.b.a. Citibus Title VI 06/03/97 equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the city of Lubbock or the federal Transit Administrations may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the services of the Attorney General in such litigation to protect the interest of the United States. DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE 1. Policy. It is the policy of the Department of Transportation that disadvantaged business enterprises as defined in 49 CFR Part 23 shall have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of contracts financed in whole or part with Federal funds provided under this agreement. Consequently, the DBE requirements of 49 CFR Part 23 apply to this agreement. 2. DBE Obligation. The recipient or its contractor agrees to ensure that disadvantaged business enterprises as defined in 49 CFR Part 23 have the maximum opportunity to participate in the performance of contracts and subcontracts financed in whole or in part with Federal funds provided under this agreement. In this regard all recipients or contractors shall take all necessary and reasonable steps in accordance with 49 CFR Part 23 to ensure that disadvantaged business enterprises have the maximum opportunity to compete for and perform contracts. Recipients and their contractors shall not discriminate on the basis of race, creed, color, national origin, age, or sex in the award and performance of DOT -assisted contracts. BUY AMERICA PROVISION This procurement is subject to the Federal Transit Administration Buy America Requirements in 49 CFR part 661, A Buy America Certificate, Attachment B, must be completed and submitted with the bid. A bid which does not include the certificate will be considered non -responsive. A waiver from the Buy America Provision may be sought by [Recipient] if grounds for the waiver exist. Section 165 (a) of the Surface Transportation Act of 1982 permits FTA participation on this contract only if steel, cement, and manufacturing products used in the contract are produced in the United States. DEBARRED BIDDERS The Contractor, including any of its officers or holders of a controlling interest, is obligated to inform the City of Lubbock whether or not it is or has been on any debarred bidders' list maintained by the United States Government. Should the contractor be included on such a list during the performance of this project, Debarment and Suspension Certificate, Attachment C. Page 2 of 5 I City Transit Management, Inc. d.b.a. Citibus Title VI 06/03/97 PROTEST/APPEAL PROCEDURES Protest/Appeal procedures are as follows: l) Request for approved equals, clarification of specifications, protest of specifications, and proposal protest must be received by the City in writing, not less than fifteen full days before date of the scheduled opening of proposals. Any request for approved equal or protest of the specifications must be fully supported with technical data, test results, or other pertinent information as evidence that the substitutes offered is equal to or better that the specifications. 2) The City's final decision to requests will be postmarked at least ten full days before the date scheduled for opening of the proposals. 3) The Federal Transit Administration (FTA) will only review protest regarding the alleged failure of the City to have a written protest procedure or alleged failure to follow such procedures. 4) If a proposer feels that a protest is necessary, in compliance with number 3 above, the protester shall file a protest with the FTA not later than five days after a final decision from the City is rendered under the City's protest/appeal procedures. In instances where the protestor alleges that the City failed to make a final determination on the protest, protesters shall file a protest with the FTA not later then five days after the protestor knew or should have known of the Citv's failure to render a final determination on the protest. The City will give the protestor the mailing address of the FTA Regional Office when requested, for the filing of a protest in accordance with these guidelines. A copy of the FTA Regional Office when requested, for the filing of a protest in accordance with these guidelines. A copy of the FTA protest must be sent to the City and also must include: - Name and address of the protestor. - Identify the City of Lubbock and the proposal number. - Statement of the grounds for protest and any supporting documentation with detail of the alleged failure to follow protest procedures or the alleged failure to have procedures, and be fully supported to the extent possible. - A copy of the local protest filed with the City and a copy of the City's decision, if any. 5) Following a protest, the City will not make an award of a contract without consulting the FTA for approval. 6) Additional information on FTA protest procedures requirements are outlined in FTA Circular 4220.1 B. A copy of this circular can be secured by contacting the City/ CONSERVATION Contractor shall recognize mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the State energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (42 USC Section 6321 et seq.,). Page 3 of 5 City Transit Management, Inc. d.b.a. Citibus Title VI 06/03/97 INTEREST OF MEMBERS OF. OR DELEGATES TO, CONGRESS In accordance with 18 U.S.C. section 431, no member of, or delegates to, the Congress of the United States shall be admitted to a share or part of this contract or to any benefit arising therefrom. CONFLICT OF INTEREST No employee, officer, or agent of the grantee shall participate in selection, or in the award or administration of a contract if a conflict of interest, real or apparent, would be involved. Such a conflict would arise when: a. The employee, officer or agent; b. Any member of his immediate family; c. His or her partner; or d. An organization which employ, has a financial or other interest in the firm selected for award. The grantee's officers, employees or agents shall neither solicit nor accept gratuities, favors or anything of monetary value from contractors, potential contractors, or parties of subagreements. TERMINATION a. Termination for Convenience The City of Lubbock may terminate this contract, in whole or in part, at any time by written notice to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid its costs, including contract closet cost, and profit on work performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall promptly submit its termination claim to the City of Lubbock to be paid the possession belonging to the City of Lubbock, the Contractor will account for the same, and dispose of it in the manner the City of Lubbock directs. b. Termination for Default If the Contractor does not deliver supplies in accordance with the contract delivery schedule; or, if the contract is for service, the Contractor fails to perform in the manner called for in the contract, or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of the contract, the City of Lubbock may terminate this contract for default. Termination shall be effected by serving a notice of termination on the contractor setting forth the manner in which the Contractor is in default. The contractor will only be paid the contract price for supplies delivered an accepted, or services performed in accordance with the manner of performance set forth in the contract. If it is later determined by the City of Lubbock that the Contractor had an excusable reason for not performing, such as a strike, fire, or flood, events which are not the fault of or are beyond the control of the Contractor, the City of Lubbock, after setting up a new delivery or performance schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work, or treat the termination as a termination for convenience. Page 4 of 5 City Transit Management, Inc. d.b.a. Citibus Title VI 06/03/97 c. Termination for Cost -Type Contracts The City of Lubbock may terminate this contract, or any portion of it, by serving a notice or termination on the Contractor. The notice shall state whether the termination is for convenience of the City of Lubbock or for the default of the Contractor. If the termination is for default, the notice shall state the manner in which the contractor has failed to perform the requirements of the contract. The Contractor shall account for any property in its possession paid for from funds received from the City of Lubbock. If the termination is for default, the City of Lubbock may fix the fee, if the contract provides for a fee, to be paid the contractor in proportion to the value, if any, of work performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall promptly submit its termination claim to the City of Lubbock, and the parties shall negotiate the terminate settlement to be paid the Contractor. If the termination is for the convenience of the City of Lubbock, the Contractor shall be paid its contract close-out costs, and a fee, if the contract provided for payment of a fee, in proportion to the work performed up to the time of termination. If, after serving a notice of termination for default, the City of Lubbock determines that the Contractor had an excusable reason for not performing, such as strike, fire, flood, events which are not the fault of and are beyond the control of the contractor, the City of Lubbock, after setting up a new work schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work, or treat the termination as a termination for convenience. Page 5 of 5 Project Book CItiC��J�, Facility Renovations GHA Project 9705 June 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. 612 Broadway Lubbock, Texas 79401 806-749-1153 Set No. Project Book Facility Renovations GHA Project 9705 June 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. 612 Broadway Lubbock, Texas 79401 806-749-1153 CITlbus Facility Renovations Lubbock, Texas June 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. Architects -Planners -Engineers GHA, Inc. Project 9705 Table of Contents Bidding Requirements and Conditions of the Contract Provided by the City of Lubbock, Purchasing Department ivision 1 General Reauirements 01010 Summary of Work 01030 Alternates 01040 Coordination and Meetings 01090 Reference Standards 01300 Submittals 01400 Quality Control 01500 Construction Facilities 01600 Material and Equipment 01700 Contract Closeout Division 2 Site Work 02050 Demolition Division 3 Concrete 03300 Concrete Work SAWPDATAMORTOC.002 TABLE OF CONTENTS TC - 1 Division 4 Masonry 04300 Unit Masonry System 04340 Reinforced Unit Masonry System Division 5 Metals 05120 Structural Steel 05500 Metal Fabrications Division 6 Wood and Plastic 06100 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry 06400 Architectural Millwork Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07213 Batt and Blanket Insulation 07900 Joint Sealers Division 8 Doors and Winnows 08111 Steel Doors and Frames 08210 Wood Doors 08700 Finish Hardware 08800 Glazing Division 9 Finishes 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting Division 10 Specialties 10675 Metal Storage Shelving Division 11 Eauinment NOT USED SAWPDATAMOSTOC.002 TABLE OF CONTENTS TC - 2 Division 12 Furnishings NOT USED Division 13 & 14 NOT USED Division 15 Mechanical 15010 General 15020 Testing 15250 Insulation 15650 Air Conditioning 15840 Ductwork 15870 Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers Division 16 Electrical 16010 General Electrical Provisions 16110 Raceways 16120 Conductors 16130 Boxes and Fittings 16140 Wiring Devices 16170 Switches and Fuses 16500 Lighting S:\WPDATA\9705\TOC.002 TABLE OF CONTENTS TC - 3 SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work covered by Contract Documents. B. Owner's responsibilities. r I l C. Contractor's use of site and premises. D. Owner occupancy of the facility. l E. Project completion time. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this project includes all items shown and/or described in the bid documents for this facility renovation project. B. All installed work shall be in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas Accessibility Standards. I l C. Work includes the removal of existing concrete masonry unit partitions, hollow metal door frames, hollow metal doors, electrical systems, floor drains and capping associated drain pipes, concrete ramp and slab, carpet and pad, wall base, floor tile, and related items built into partitions. D. The scope of work includes the construction of new concrete masonry unit partitions, new hollow Imetal doors and frames, new HVAC, new electrical, new carpet, new finishes, and related work. E. The scope of work also includes the relocation of some existing components to locations shown on the renovation drawings. 1.4 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Assist the contractor in maintaining job site safety by instructing employees of the potential dangers at the site. B. Provide access for the contractor to portions of the existing site as may be required for this project. C. Provide parking and storage space for contractor's employees, equipment, and materials. 01997 Green Harvey Architects. Inc. SUMMARY OF WORK Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 01010 - 1 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Limit the use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by others. 3. Use of site and adjacent building premises. 1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. The owner will occupy the site and adjacent buildings during entire period of construction for the conduct of normal operations. B. Cooperate with owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate owner's operations. 1. Temporary interruptions must be scheduled at least 48 hours in advance with the architect. 2. The facility is not to be without utilities for any period of time due to this project. 3. Maintain a clear path for busses and emergency vehicles at all times. C. Schedule the work to accommodate these requirements. D. Contractor is responsible for the safety of visitors to the job site. 1.7 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Include allowance amounts stated in proposal. B. The contingency allowance or a portion there of will only be released for use by the contractor after the contractor has delivered a written request for additional monies with a complete cost breakdown to the owner and a written authorization has been issued by the owner or owners representative. The purchase, delivery, and installation of materials for which a written request for additional monies has not been received by the owner or that written authorization has not been issued by the owner is at the contractor's own risk. 1.8 PROJECT COMPLETION TIME A. The entire scope of work included in this contract and described herein shall reach substantial completion by September 22, 1997. B. See Article 8.1 of the General Conditions for definition of Working Days. C. See Article 8.2 of the General Conditions for computation of Contract Time. D. See Article 8.3 of the General Conditions for claims for extension of Contract Time. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 r SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Alternate One: All work related to the preparations of sanding, scraping, priming, ect. that is assoicated with the exterior new paint. B. Alternate One: Labor and material to paint all exisimg exterior painted surfaces with a selected color. Architect and owner to select color. C. Legend: 1. Base Bid. 2. First Add Alternate. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED n 1997 Green Harvey Architects. Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited. END OF SECTION ALTERNATES 01030 - 1 I SECTION 01040 r COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. r 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES IA. Coordination. I B. Renovation project procedures. I C. Existing conditions. D. Pre -Construction conference. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. A separate project schedule shall be provided by the contractor for each site. C. Do not commence work at the site until all of the materials and equipment to be incorporated into the project are on the site or within one day of delivery to the site. D. The contractor shall schedule and coordinate the work so that once Notice to Proceed is given and work commences, the work will progress continually without interruption until the work at the site is substantially completed. E. Contractor shall coordinate completion and clean up of work in preparation for substantial completion. F. Contractor shall coordinate all construction activities and storage of materials with the architect and Citibus representative so as to minimize disruption of activities at the sites. The facilities shall continue their daily activities throughout the life of this contract. 1.4 RENOVATION PROJECT PROCEDURES fA. Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and l extending work. B. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original condition. COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01040 - 1 ° 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited. C. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. Notify architect if conditions will not allow an acceptable transition. D. When futished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to the architect. 1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Underground utilities: Failure of the drawings to show underground utility lines or other concealed piping, wiring and the like shall not be constructed as a guarantee on the part of the architect or the owner that such conditions do not exist, though unknown. All operations involving excavation or removals shall be done at the risk of the contractor who shall take the necessary precautions to protect employees and the public from injury or death and to avoid damage to existing systems. B. Damage to existing systems: Whether exposed or concealed, any piping (such as piping for gas, water, waste, vent, drainage, sewer, heating, or cooling systems, etc.) or wiring (such as wiring for electric lighting, power, public address, telephone, or signalling systems, etc.) which is encountered during the construction period and becomes damaged shall be repaired or replaced at a mutually agreed price. Only life and property threatening conditions may be repaired prior to a fully executed field order. 1.6 PRE -CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Attendance: After award of contract and prior to start of construction, contractor's direct representative, major subcontractors, owner's employees responsible for project, architects and engineers shall attend conference. Time and location as mutually agreed. B. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner -Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents, 4. Submission of list of subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in contract. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Use of premises by owner and contractor. 8. Owner's requirements. 9. Security and housekeeping procedures. 10. Project Schedules. 11. Procedures for maintaining record documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01040 - 2 SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART1 GENERAL C 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this l Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. B. Schedule of references. C. Adherence to accessibility standards. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions: Reference Standards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal standards, comply with l l requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of contract documents. C. Obtain copies of standards when required by contract documents. D. Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request clarification from architect before proceeding. E. The contractual relationship of the parties to the contract shall not be altered from the contract documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.5 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute ADA Americans with Disabilities Act e 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized duplication Prohibited. REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 1 ADC Air Diffusion Council AGC Associated General Contractors of America AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMCA Air Movement and Control Association ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BIA Brick Institute of America CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute DHI Door and Hardware Institute FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FM Factory Mutual System FS Federal Specification GA Gypsum Association MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association. ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 2 PART 2 PART 3 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association PCA Portland Cement Association PS Product Standard SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' Association TAS Texas Accessibility Standards UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WWPA Western Wood Products Association PRODUCTS NOT USED EXECUTION A. The general contractor and all sub -contractors constructing, installing, or providing materials for this project shall provide and/or install building components that comply with these standards. B. Special attention shall be given to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) criteria. The contractors shall make themselves knowledgeable of ADA and TAS criteria and shall comply with the latest adopted version of these standards and acts. END OF SECTION REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 3 SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction Progress Schedules. C. Shop drawings. D. Samples. E. Manufacturer's instructions. F. Manufacturer's certificates. G. Submittal Schedule. H. AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment. I. AIA Form G703 - Continuation Sheet. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranty and closeout submittals. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810 or contractor's standard preprinted transmittal form. Identify the project title, project number, numbers of copies submitted, notice of deviation from contract documents and any other pertinent data. B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. C. Identify project, contractor, subcontractors or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification section number, as appropriate. D. Coordinate and schedule submittals to expedite the project. E. Deliver all copies of the submittals to the architect's business address. ° 1997 Green Harvey Architects. Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1 1.5 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed for architect's review. B. Revise and resubmit as required. C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major section of work or operation, identifying first work day of each week. E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of work at each submission. G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by owner and under allowances. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings with all product literature, cut sheets, and photographs in a bound format. B. Submit the number of copies which the contractor requires, plus three copies which will be retained by the architect and owner. C. Mark in GREEN INK each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this project. The architect's review comments will be in RED INK. D. Apply contractor's stamp, signed, or initialled certifying that review, verification of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the work and contract documents. Submittals delivered to the architect for review that have not been stamped and initialed will be returned without review. E. Identify variations from contract documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed work. F. Provide space for architect's review stamps. G. Revise and resubmit shop drawings as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. H. Distribute copies of reviewed shop drawings to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. Provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2 1.7 SHOP DRAWING REVIEW A. The architect shall affix a stamp upon the submittal with appropriate wording stating if submittal is accepted, accepted with noted revisions, revise and re -submit, or rejected. Rejected submittals are to be completely re -worked and submitted as a new submittal. ] B. The contractor shall not begin work or order material for which a submittal is required until a 111 submittal has been stamped accepted or accepted with noted revisions and returned to the contractor. C. Schedule submissions at least 14 working days before date reviewed submittal will be needed. The architect shall be allowed 14 working days for each submittal review. D. The architect shall notify the contractor when submittals are reviewed and ready for inclusion into the project. E. The architect shall review the same shop drawing submittal no more than two times. If more than two submittals are required in order to achieve an accepted submittal, the contractor shall be charged $100.00 per hour for each review beyond the initial two. The architect's review fee shall be paid by the contractor in full prior to the release of the accepted shop drawings. 1.8 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing with work. B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in custom colors selected, textures, and patterns for architect's selection. C. Include identification on each sample, with full project information. D. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification sections. Provide at least two copies of each item being submitted for review and selection. These copies will not be returned. E. Reviewed samples which may be used in the work are indicated in individual specification sections. 1.9 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for product data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and contract documents. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to architect for review, in quantities specified for product data. B. Indicate that material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to architect. SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3 PART PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE Section No. Section Title Paragraph 01400 .................... Quality Control ....................... 1.8 01500 .................... Construction Facilities .................. 1.4 .........................................................1.7 ........................................1.12 01600 .................... Material and Equipment ................. 1.7 01700 .................... Contract Closeout ..................... 1.3 ...........................................................1.6 ...........................................................1.7 ...........................................................1.8 ...........................................................1.9 02050 .................... Demolition .......................... 1.3 03300 .................... Concrete ........................... 1.5 ...........................................................2.2 ..............................3.14 04300 .................... Unit Masonry System ................... 1.6 ...........................................................2.2 04340 .................... Reinforced Unit Masonry System ........... 1.5 05120 .................... Structural Steel ....................... 1.4 05500 .................... Metal Fabrications ..................... 1.6 06100 .................... Rough Carpentry ...................... 1.4 06200 .................... Finish Carpentry ...................... 1.5 06400 .................... Architectural Millwork .................. 1.7 07105 .................... Dampproofing and Waterproofing ........... 1.4 07213 .................... Batt and Blanket Insulation ................ 1.6 07900 .................... Joint Sealers ......................... 1.6 08111 .................... Steel Doors and Frames .................. 1.6 08210 .................... Wood Doors ......................... 1.3 08705 .................... Door Hardware ....................... 1.8 ...........................................................2.3 08800 .................... Glazing ............................ 1.6 09260 .................... Gypsum Board Systems .................. 1.8 09511 .................... Suspended Acoustical Ceilings ............. 1.5 09680 .................... Carpet ............................. 1.3 09900 .................... Painting ............................ 1.7 15010.................... General ............................ 1.3 15020 .................... Testing ............................ 2.1 15060 .................... Piping ............................. 1.3 15250 .................... Insulation ........................... 1.3 15400 .................... Plumbing ........................... 1.3 15804 .................... Ventilating .......................... 1.3 15840 ................... I Ductwork ........................... 1.3 15870 .................... Grilles, Registers and Ceiling Diffusers ....... 1.3 16010 .................... General Electrical Provisions .............. 1.4 ...........................................3.7 16110 .................... Raceways ........................... 3.3 16500 .................... Lighting ............................ 1.3 END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS 01300 - 4 SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance and control of installation. B. References, C. Field samples. D. Inspection and testing laboratory services. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates. C. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality. D. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required and standards for testing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with contract documents, request clarification from architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 1 ° 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited— 1.5 1.6 1.7 REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of contract documents. B. Obtain copies of standards when required by contract documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with contract documents, request clarification from architect before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the contract shall not be altered from the contract documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. E. ANSI/ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials Used in Construction. FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications sections for review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work. C. Where field sample is specified in individual sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by architect. OWNER'S INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Owner may employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory or owner may use its own personnel and facilities to perform inspection and testing laboratory services. B. If the results provided by the Owner's laboratory differ from the contractor's laboratory report, the owner's laboratory shall be final. C. Work found to be unsatisfactory according to test results, shall be removed from the project and re- constructed at contractor's expense. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. The contractor shall employ and pay for a reputable testing laboratory to perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification sections and as required by the architect. B. The testing laboratory shall be submitted to the architect for review and acceptance two weeks prior to the first sampling of construction materials. 1. Submittal shall provide years of experience qualifications and certificates of owners, and name lab representative who will be responsible for this project. C. Reports will be submitted directly to the architect from laboratory, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of test and indicating compliance or non-compliance with contract documents. Copies of reports shall also be sent to the contractor for his use. QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 2 D. Cooperate with testing laboratory: furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 1. Notify testing laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with testing laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for contractor's use. E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same testing laboratory on instructions by the architect. Payment for retesting will be charged to the contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from the contract sum. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION QUALITY CONTROL 01400 - 3 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. I1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Product options. E. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Instruction to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for salvage and reuse. B. Do not reuse materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the contract documents or as approved by the architect. C. For similar components provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer. 1.5 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, r If and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. ° 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. unauthortzed duplication Prohibited. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1 1 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original unopened containers or packaging with identify labels intact and legible. 2. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation in order to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. B. Storage: 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 3. Provide off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection. 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Provide mixing with foreign matter. 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. C. Handling: 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by the manufacturer or as required to protect from damage during storage and installation. 2. Do not handle material in such a way that may leave permanent scars, dents, impressions, cracks, or blemishes. 1.7 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period to requirements specified in this section. B. Substitutions may be considered after the bid date only when a product becomes unavailable through no fault to the contractor. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 i 1.13 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to substantial completion inspections. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. I D. Remove all job signs, barriers, fences, controls and repair holes dug for posts. l 1,14 HAUL ROUTE A. All materials, tools, equipment, etc. shall be transported via the shortest route possible. PART PRODUCTS ' NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 3 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. [ 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary Facilities: Contractor's employees, state employees and public. B. Temporary Utilities: Electrical, water, sewer, gas and telephone. C. Field Offices: Services and size. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the work, and water control. E. Construction Facilities: Parking, progress cleaning, and project signage. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. 1.4 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES f r A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Existing facilities may be used by L construction crews within reason. f 1.5 TEMPORARY UTILITIES I` A. Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary piping and wiring required for construction. B. All temporary utility connections and distribution shall be approved by owner and respective local utility companies, and shall be removed by contractor at completion of construction. r 1.6 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES fl A. At contractor's option, provide weather tight enclosure with lights, telephone, and layout table for drawings. Space within the building may be designated for the contractor's use. B. Facility shall be large enough to allow for at least three people to stand and meet comfortably. 1.7 BARRIERS A. Provide suitable barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas while still allowing access for owner's use of site. Protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage during construction operation and demolition. Type of barrier to be used will be at the discretion C of the contractor and the circumstance involved. The contractor to submit proposed barrier for review and approval by owner. B. Protect vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 1 C. Clearly post warning signs all around the work sites. Signs are to be secured to the barriers. D. Suitable barriers include durable solid partitions, chain -link fences, temporary dust and acoustic partitions and woven fabric. Suitable barriers do not include ropes or warning tape tied to saw horses or similar devices. E. Prohibit traffic through landscaped areas. 1.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in the immediate work area so as to minimize damage of installed work. 1.9 SECURITY A. Contractor shall provide security and facilities to protect work, existing facilities, and owner's operations directly adjacent to new construction from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. The loss of building materials and/or equipment from the job site will be replaced with same at contractor's expense. C. Coordinate with owner's security program. 1.10 PARKING A. Arrange for temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. B. Coordinate with owner for owner's employee parking. C. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off -site parking. 1.11 PROJECT SIGNAGE A. Contractor and sub -contractors may use one combined sign measuring 4 feet wide and 8 feet high mounted securely to sign posts. If the contractor wishes to use a sign, the architect/owner shall review wording and location before sign is to be installed. B. If requested, the contractor shall install architect's job sign on contractor -supplied sign posts as directed by the architect. C. Project signs are to remain in place until the project is complete. Remove signs only upon reaching substantial completion. 1.12 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean, orderly condition. B. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off -site. C. Do not allow hazardous conditions to develop or continue. This shall include lumber with un-pulled nails and concrete with projecting rebars. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 - 2 SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A, The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Transportation and handling. C. Storage and protection. D. Product options. E. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Instruction to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for salvage and reuse. B. Do not reuse materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the contract documents or as approved by the architect. C. For similar components provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer. 1.5 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A, Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. ° 1997 Green Harvey Architects. Inc. Unauthorized duplication Prohibited. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original unopened containers or packaging with identify labels intact and legible. 2. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation in order to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. B. Storage: 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 3. Provide off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection. 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Provide mixing with foreign matter. 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. C. Handling: 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by the manufacturer or as required to protect from damage during storage and installation. 2. Do not handle material in such a way that may leave permanent scars, dents, impressions, cracks, or blemishes. 1.7 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products specified by reference standards or by description only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a provision for substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named. 1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Instructions to bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period to requirements specified in this section. B. Substitutions may be considered after the bid date only when a product becomes unavailable through no fault to the contractor. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with contract documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the work to be complete with no additional cost to owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse for review or redesign services associated with re -approval by authorities. E. will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the contract documents. F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product's equivalence. 3. The architect will notify contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. 1.9 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION METHODS OPTIONS A. Where contract documents indicate no specific method of construction, the contractor shall employ standard industry practices. B. Where contract documents indicate a specific method of construction, the contractor shall employ the method indicated or, at his option, may submit a written request for an alternate method of construction. C. Architect/engineer will consider written requests for alternate construction methods, if received in time as to allow for review and return of such requests and for alternation to be made with no delay to total construction methods. See contract for total working days allowed. D. Submit separate requests for each alternate. Support each request with three copes of complete details and/or documentation for alteration. 1. Indicate changes of materials to be used. 2. Show significant effects of alterations to other affects of alterations to other affected areas. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3 SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. H. Starting of systems. 1.3 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that contract documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with contract documents and ready for architect's inspection. B. Final payment will be authorized only after all requirements of this section have been met, all punch list items have been completed and verified by the architect, updated record documents have been delivered to the architect, and complete operation and maintenance manuals have been delivered to the architect. Submit final application for payment identifying total adjusted contract sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.4 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. 1997Green Harvey Architects. Inc. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 Unauthorimd duplication prohibited.d. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 1.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. B. Demonstrate operation to owner and architect. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the work: 1. Contract drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change orders and other modifications to the contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. Record all actual revisions to the work. B. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by addenda and modifications. E. Record documents and shop drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish main floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original contract drawings. F. Submit documents to architect with claim for final application for payment. 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two complete sets of operation and maintenance data prior to final payment. Information is to be organized on 8-1/2 x 11 inch pages, bound in three ring binders with durable plastic covers. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2 B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. 1. Label multiple binders as "Volume I of II" and Volume II of II', as appropriate. C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below, with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified. E. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of architect, contractor, subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. F. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. ' G. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. All approved shop drawings and product data. f2. Hauling and dumping permits, receipts, and/or manifest. 3. Air and water balance reports. 4. Written statement certifying that all building materials installed in project are asbestos free. 5. Natural gas pressure test and certification. 6. Contractors' Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. Use latest version of AIA Documents G706 and G706A. 7. Certificates issued by the architect; change orders, addenda, field reports, etc. 8. Photocopies of manufacturers' warranties and bonds. 9. General Contractor's and Sub -Contractors' warranties. 1.8 WARRANTIES A. Provide a written warranty on contractor's business letterhead stating that the building is warranted against defects in material and labor for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. B. Warranty letter shall also state that installed building components comply with the latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards and Americans with Disabilities Act. C. A letter of warranty shall be provided by the general contractor and each major sub -contractor. 1. Major sub -contractors are those who are responsible for a building system installed in the building. 1.9 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3 B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed by owner and obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1.10 STARTING OF SYSTEMS A. Preparation: 1. Notify architect seven days prior to start-up of each system. 2. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. 3. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. 4. Verify wiring and support components are complete and tested. 5. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 6. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble shooting, servicing maintenance and shutdown of each piece of equipment to owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. 7. Amount of time to be devoted to instruction shall be reasonable and consistent with size of installation and its complexity. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 4 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION ` PART1 GENERAL I 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS I A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this I Section. r L2 SECTION INCLUDES 1 A. Dust control. B. Protection. C. Availability of work areas. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The procedures proposed for the accomplishment of salvage and demolition work shall be submitted for approval. The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the work, careful removal and disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, protection of property which is to remain undisturbed, and coordination with other work in progress. The procedures shall include detailed description of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation, and the sequence of r operations. L 1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The work includes demolition or removal of existing construction indicated or specified. All materials resulting from demolition work, except as indicated or specified otherwise, shall become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the limits of owner's property within five working days of dismantling. B. Maintain a clean and organized job site throughout the demolition phase of the work. C. Coordinate the removal of any security devices with the owner's security representative. D. Coordinate construction routes through existing, undisturbed portions of the facility with the I architect prior to beginning demolition. L L ° 1997 Green Harvey Architects. Inc. naut Uhorized duplication prohibited. DEMOLITION 02050 - 1 1.6 DUST CONTROL A. The amount of dust resulting from demolition shall be controlled to prevent the spread of dust to occupied portions of the building and to avoid creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area. Use of water will not be permitted when it will result in, or create, hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding and pollution. B. Maintain barriers until that portion of the project is complete. 1.7 PROTECTION A. Protection of Existing Work: Before beginning any demolition work, the contractor shall carefully survey the existing work and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. The contractor shall take all necessary precautions to ensure against damage to existing work to remain in place, any damage to such work shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the owner. The contractor shall carefully coordinate the work of this section with all other work and construct and maintain shoring, bracing and supports, as required. B. Isolate demolition areas from occupied portions of the building with suitable barriers. Suitable barriers include those described in Section 01500, 1.7 Barriers and Part 2 of this section. 1.8 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS A. Areas in which demolition work is to be accomplished will be available in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. Coordinate work with owner's activities. Restrict unauthorized access to the project site, unless other wise instructed by the architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUST BARRIERS A. Minimum of 12 mil polyethelene sheets adequately secured to supports with duct tapes, staples, cleats, nails, etc. Replace sheet if tears or holes can not be closed satisfactory. B. Provide an access door in dust barrier that can be locked or secured close. C. Brightly colored warning signs are to be attached to barrier and continually maintained throughout the life of the barrier. 2.2 ACOUSTIC BARRIERS A. Minimum of 5/8" thick g,psum wall board secured to metal or wood studs. Place an acoustic foam gasket between the adjacent surfaces and the barrier. Maintain the barrier throughout the demolition phase of the work. B. Provide an acoustically sound access door in barrier that can be locked or secured closed. C. Brightly colored warning signs are to be attached to barrier and continually maintained throughout the life of the barrier. DEMOLITION 02050 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES A. Existing Surfacing: Existing floors and wall surfaces are not to be damaged during demolition. Protect from damage with suitable measures. B. • Other Facilities: Remove within the limits shown to a logical and straight termination as noted on the drawings. C. Temporary: Those materials noted to be temporarily removed, to allow access to areas affected by this work and then re -installed to match existing adjacent materials, shall be protected from damage and stored on site as directed. 3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS A. Title to Materials: Title to all materials and equipment to be demolished is vested in the contractor upon receipt of notice to proceed. Items noted to be salvaged shall be returned to the owner and stored as directed. B. Disposition: All materials resulting from demolition shall be disposed by the contractor in accordance with all applicable laws, codes, and ordinances. 3.3 CLEAN-UP A. Debris and Rubbish: Debris and rubbish shall be removed from work sites on a regular basis. Only by prior approval of the architect will debris and rubbish be allowed to accumulate on the site for more than a week. B. Debris Control: Debris shall be removed and transported in a manner as to prevent spillage on streets or adjacent areas. C. The contractor is not permitted to use owner's refuse containers. DEMOLITION 02050 - 3 D. Regulations: Applicable federal, state and local regulations regarding hauling and disposal apply. Provide copies of hauling and dumping permits, receipts, or manifest to architect. Include copies in operations and maintenance manual. E. Cleanliness of Site: Due to the high visibility of the site and potential danger to the public, maintaining a clean and safe site will be critical. END OF SECTION DEMOLITION 02050 - 4 SECTION 03300 CONCRETE WORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02050 - Demolition B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provision of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" 2. ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete" 3. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection" 4. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" 5. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Reinforced Concrete" 6. MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice" B. Workmanship: The contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the architect. C. Design and Testing 1. The contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. e 1997 Green Harvey Associates, Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 1 D. Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at contractor's expense, a testing laboratory acceptable to architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1. Job site cylinders shall be taken as directed by the architect. The contractor shall notify the testing laboratory. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders and be responsible for their care and handling, including breaking same at laboratory. 2. Test results shall be furnished to the architect, engineer, and the contractor. 3. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the architect, at any time during the progress of the work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities at all items. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the owner's expense, including the retesting of the rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the contractor's expense. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, patterns, stair nosings and others as requested by the architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structure" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metal framed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or good as new. B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise acceptable to architect. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. D. Earth Trench Forms: Earth trench type forming shall only be used where continuous type or square spot footings are shown on the drawings. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 2 1 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and stirrups may be Grade 40. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, 6 x 6 - W2.1 x W2.1, welded steel fabric unless other wise noted. C. Dowels for load transfer in floors shall be plain steel bars conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 60 or ASTM A 499. D. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick, and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slab -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base material will not support chair legs. 3. For exposed -to -view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot -dip galvanized, or plastic protected or stainless steel protected. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150, type I, unless otherwise acceptable to architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to architect. B. Fine Aggregate: 1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 2. Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one- third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars of bundles or bars. b. The limitations may be waived if, in the judgement of the architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb of voids. D. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1%A chloride ions. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 3 G. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows: I. Type B, Retarding 2. Type C, Accelerating 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating H. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Architect. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G containing not more than 0.1 % chloride ions. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. B. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per square yard, complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene -coated burlap. D. Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. 1. Guardian Chemical Company, clear bond at the rate of 400 square feet to the gallon. E. Hardening, Sealing, and Dustproofmg: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. All exposed slabs not covered with tile on other applied surface finish shall receive second application where construction work is complete. 1. A second application of Guardian Chemical Company, Clear Bond at the rate of 600 square feet to the gallons over the curing compound cost. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use and independent testing facility acceptable to the architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. C. Submit written reports to the architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the architect. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 4 2.6 2.7 D. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules: 1. 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum (non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air entrained). E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by the contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant, at no additional cost to the owner and as accepted by the architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by the architect before using in the work. ADMIXTURES A. Use water -reducing admixture or high range water -reducing admixture (super plasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use color admixture in concrete where noted and at pattern concrete locations. Submit color selection chart for approval. Color admixture is to be added at the mixing plant, not at the site. C. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. D. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air - entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 1. 5.5 % with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0 % with 1 " maximum aggregate 3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate E. Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. F. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. SLUMP LIMITS A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3". 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8" after addition of HRWR to verified 2%3" slump concrete. 4. All Other Concrete: Not more than 4". 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 5 B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2.9 PATTERN CONCRETE A. Submit slate design patterns for use in the four concrete paving sections and along glass under the entrance canopy where shown on plans. Submit tactile flat domes pattern at ramps. B. Pattern concrete shall meet the same specifications as required for other concrete paving in this project. C. All pattern concrete is to have pigmented concrete, color to be selected by architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete surface and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against the concrete surface. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling, and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is in accessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designated to prevent form defection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 6 H. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1-1/2" inside concrete. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. I. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases fo: runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. F. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints 1. Locate and install construction joints, where are not shown on the drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the architect. 2. Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. 3. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction joints. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 7 B. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. Use screed type joints equal to those manufacturer by Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. Screed key joints are of 24 gauge galvanized steel with 1 1/8" dowel knockouts at 6" on centers. Install with a minimum of five special 16 gauge by 1" stakes per ten feet of length of material. C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of the items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkhead and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required elevations and contours in the finishes slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Coat the contact surface of forms with a form -coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. B. Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Add fibrous concrete reinforcement to concrete materials at the time concrete is batched in amounts in accordance with approved submittals for this types of concrete. Mix batched concrete in strict accordance with the fibrous concrete reinforcement manufacturer's instruction and recommendations for uniform and complete dispersion. 3. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 4. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 8 B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect, and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand - spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete, maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced location not farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of the mix. D. Placing Concrete Slabs 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. E. Cold Weather Placing 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which would be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified. 2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of placement. 3. Do not use frozen materials or material containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. F. Hot Weather Placing 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete on compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 9 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot so that the steel and temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or by other construction, unless otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood blocks. B. Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting, or other similar system. This is the as - cast concrete surface as obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas repaired and parched as specified, and fins and other projections on the surface completely removed and smoothed. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise shown. 3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile or other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as shown on the drawings. 1. After placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance not exceeding 1/2" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as shown on the drawings or in schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driver floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel finish: 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint, or other thinfilm finish coating system. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 10 After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Non -Slip Broom Finish: 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platform, steps and ramps, walks and elsewhere as shown on the drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the architect before application. E. Pattern Finish: 1. Apply pattern finish to exterior concrete ramps as shown on the drawings. 2. Use only the approved pattern finish as submitted. 3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Continuous water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surface and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 11 b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during this curing period. C. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surface which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofmg, membrane roofmg, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the architect. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surface, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless specified otherwise, by methods specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, maybe removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beams, soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength if inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.11 RE -USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten Forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to architect. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 12 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling -in: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on the drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: 1. Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to architect. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/3" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the areas to be patched with neat cement grout, or proprietary bonding agent. 3. For exposed to view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: 1. Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities; cracks; spalls; air bubbles; honeycomb; rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Where possible, repair concealed formed surfaces that contain defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces 1. Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, form smoothness and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required slope. 2. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, pop -puts, honeycomb, rock pockets and other objectionable conditions. 3. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 4. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after, completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to architect. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 13 Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding V diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over V in diameter by dry pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. D. Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by architect. E. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of architect. 3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all other tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. 6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. a. When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class on concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used. b. When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the architect, if, in his judgement, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 14 C. When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in -place concrete. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the architect, engineer and the contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing services, concrete type and I class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determined adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required when unacceptable concrete is verified. 3.15 TEXAS ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS A. All new concrete walks, sloped walks, ramps, curb cuts, curb ramps, surface textures, and dimensions shall comply with the Texas Accessibility Standards of the Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes. B. New and renovated concrete surfaces shall provide at least a 2% positive slope away from accessible routes. Do not allow any water to stand within accessible routes. END OF SECTION CONCRETE WORK 03300 - 15 SECTION 04300 UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Concrete unit masonry backup walls, complete with reinforcement and anchorages. B. Exterior facing brick. C. Form control joints. D. Built-in items supplied by other trades. E. Cut and fit for items furnished and installed by other trades. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Concre:e Work. B. Section 04340 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System. C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication. D. Section 06100 - Rough.Carpentry. E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. G. Section 08100 - Hallow Metal Frames. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform concrete unit masonry work in accordance with requirements of ANSI A 41.1, unless indicated otherwise herein. F ° 1997 Green Harvey Associates, Inc. Iunauthorized duplication prohibited UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 1 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 90-95 Hollow load bearing CMU. B. ASTM C 91 Masonry Cement C. ASTM C 140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Unit. D. ASTM C 150 Portland Cement. E. ASTM C 207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. F. ASTM C 216 Facing Brick. G. ASTM C 270 Specifications for Mortar for Unit Masonry. H. ASTM C 426 Test for Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Block. I. ASTM C 476 Specification for Grout for Masonry. J. ASTM A 82 Cold -Drawn Steel Wire - Plain for Reinforcement. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Compliance: Manufacturer's certification that masonry units furnished meet or exceed requirements of this section. B. Test Reports: Certify that concrete masonry units and mortar mix proposed conform to the following: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 140 and C426. 2. Mortar: ASTM C270. C. Product literature of items specified; include manufacturer's literature on sizes, maintenance, cleaning, water repellent, and graffite control. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials off ground and protected from wetting by capillary action, rain or snow and protected from mud, dust or other material and contaminating material. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Hot Weather Requirement: 1. Protect all masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun for 48 hours after erection when ambient air temperature exceeds 99 degrees F and when shaded with relative humidity less than 50 percent. 2. Provide suitable coverings or barriers to deflect direct sunlight and wind. B. Temperature: No masonry work shall be conducted when ambient temperature is falling and below 50 degrees F. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Concrete Masonry Units and Face Brick. 1. Featherlite Building Products, 2. Acme Brick, 3. Elgin -Butler Brick. 4. Henderson Clay Products. B. Glass Blocks 1. Solaris. 2. Acme Brick. Weck, Glashaus, Inc. C. Water Repellent 1. Thoro: Thoroclear 777. 2. Okon. 3. Prime-A-Pell200. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. Thicknesses as indicated on the drawings. 2. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, healers, bonding and other special conditions. 3. Hollow Loading -Bearing CMU: ASTM C 90-95, Grade "N". 4. Weight: Provide lightweight units using aggregate complying with ASTM C 331 producing dry net unit weight of not more than 105 lbs. per cubic foot, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Curing: Cure units in a moisture -controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave and normal pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C 90-95, Type I. a. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site. B, Face Brick: 1. Size: Unless otherwise indicated, provide bricks manufactured to the following nominal dimensions: a. King: 2 3/8" x 3 3/8" x 9 5/8", match the existing hospital. b. Special Shapes: Provide where necessary for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. 2. For applications resulting in exposure of brick surfaces which otherwise would be concealed from view, provide uncored or unfrogged units with all exposed surfaces finished. 3. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, and as follows: a. Type of Grade: SW. b, Type: Type FBS (normal size and color variations). UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 3 C. Application: Use where brick is exposed, unless otherwise indicated. d. Texture and Color: Match existing texture and color scheme of hospital. Submit samples for approval prior to ordering. e. Coursing is to match existing hospital; 1/3 running bond. C. Glass Block: 1. Manufactured by Solaris, bronze color, flemish pattern. 2. Nominal dimension of 4 x 4 x 4. 3. Colored sealant to finish last 3/8" depth of both exposed faces of joints. Color to be selected. Use double parallel galvanized wires or 20 gage perforated straps at 24" on center vertical. D. Mortar: 1. Mortar mixes: Conform to ASTM C 270, and the following: a. Type "S" Mortar, for all masonry. One part Portland Cement, 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime, 2-3/4 to 4-1/2 parts damp loose sand or 1/2 part Portland Cement, 1 part masonry cement, 3-3/8 to 4-1/2 parts damp loose sand. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, one sack 94# net, considered one cubic foot. 3. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 furnished in sacks containing one cubic foot each, marked with the weight. One sack considered one cubic foot. Exterior masonry cement shall contain integral waterproofing. Masonry cement shall be manufactured by Atlas, Lehigh, Lonestar, Trinity or an approval equal. 4. Sand: (Fine Aggregate) 80# damp, considered one cubic foot ASTM C 144 of acceptable color graded within the following limits: SIEVE NO. PERCENT OF SAND RETAINED MAX. (BY WEIGHT) MIN. 4 0 0 8 5 0 16 40 0 30 65 30 50 85 65 100 98 85 Water: Clean and free from injurious amounts of oil acids, soluble salts, and organic impurities. Colors shall be as selected by architect. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. E. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchoring Devices: 1. Zinc -Coated Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire, ASTM A 641, Class 3 for zinc coating. 2. Joint Reinforcement: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet. Fabricate from cold - drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, and a unit width of 1-1/2" to 2" less than thickness of wall or partition, with prefabricated comer and tee units, and as follows: a. Wire Size for Side Rods: 9 gauge diameter. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 4 b. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 9 gauge diameter. C. For multi-wythe or cavity exterior masonry back-up fabricate units with additional side rods spaced for embedment in inside face of back-up wythe. 3. Veneer Anchors and Ties: Screw on anchor of at least 12 gage hot dipped galvanized metal with two screw holes per anchor. Flexible wire ties of hot dipped galvanized 3/16 inch wire by suitable length. Flexible straps of hot dipped galvanized 16 gage by at least 1 1/4 inch wide by suitable length with 1/4 inch anchor holes. 4. Miscellaneous Masonry Anchors: Fabricated from 16 gauge steel sheet or 3/8" steel rod, 1.5 oz. hot -dip zinc coating after fabrication. F. Flashing for Masonry: 1. Provide concealed flashings, shown to be built into masonry. 2. Provide concealed flashings as follows: a. Asphalt -Coated Copper: Copper coated both sides with flexible fabricated asphalt. b. Fabricate with 3 oz. copper, unless otherwise indicated, as produced by AFCO Flashings or Equal. 3. Provide plastic flashing as follows: a. Sheet polyvinyl chloride, 30 mil thickness (0.030), 3.3 oz/SF, ASTM D 822, 48 or 72 inches wide rolls. York Flashings: Wascoseal. b. Use rubber base adhesive compound for bonding polyvinyl chloride sheets. G. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories: 1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 of the sizes shown. 2. Metal Expansion Joint Strips: Provide the following formed to the shape shown. a. Bond Breaker Strips: 30 lb. asphalt roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, or 30 lb., coal -tar roofing felt complying with ASTM D 227. b. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated. 3. Rubber Expansion Joints: Provide rubber Blok-Tite gaskets as produced by AA Wire Products Co., or equal. Install as shown on the drawings. 4. Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic as recommended by masonry manufacturer. 5. Provide pre -cast concrete apple logo on each face of the outer most band of masonry columns along the entrance, see drawings. Precast units of art work provided, approximately 9 x 10 king brick module. McC Masonry Casting Corp., Amarillo, 1-806- 359-4912. H. Water Repellent: 1. Masonry water repellent shall be equal to Prime -A -Pell 200, manufactured by Chemprobe Corporation. 2. Install per manufacturer's instructions. I. Graffiti Control: 1. Graffiti control shall be equal to Defacer Eraser, manufactured by ProSoCo, Inc., telephone 913-281-2700. 2. Provide of least two gallons of Defacer Eraser Graffiti wipe supplement to Graffiti Control. Store where directed by Owner. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine other construction which is to support or interface with masonry work for conditions that would prevent proper installation of masonry. B. Where footings and shelves are not sound or level, where anchorage devices have not been installed, where interfaces exist, or where there are other conditions unsuitable for proper installation of masonry, do not start masonry work until other construction has been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install masonry units in running bond to match the existing brick patterns. B. Cut exposed masonry units, where necessary with a power saw. 1. Avoid the use (by proper layout) of less than half size units. C. Wet brick prior to laying. D. Hold uniform joint sizes of 3/8", unless otherwise indicated. Hold joint sizes to suit modular size of masonry units. E. Cut joints flush and tool slightly concave, unless otherwise indicated. F. Keep cavities between masonry and insulation clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. G. Reinforce horizontal joints with continuous masonry joint reinforcement, spaced 16" vertically. Do not bridge control and expansion joints in the wall system. H. Build other work into the masonry work as shown, fitting masonry units around other work, and grouting for secure anchorage. I. Protect newly laid masonry from exposure to precipitation, excessive drying, freezing, soiling, backfill and other harmful elements. J. At end of each day's work, use a medium soft dry nylon brush to clean masonry work. K. Weep Holes: 1. Provide weep holes in head joints in same course of masonry bedded in the flashing mortar. 2. Provide weep holes spaced 32" apart at the bottom of (and at edges in) cavities. 3. Provide preformed plastic tubes with cotton wick inserts. L. Structural Bonding of Multi-Wythe Masonry: 1. Use continuous joint reinforcing embedded in horizontal joints for bond tie between wythes. Install at not more than 16" o.c. vertically as specified. Provide continuity at corners and intersections using prefabricated "L" and "T" units. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 6 M. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6" at ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity. 2. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: a. For multi-wythe walls where continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by code but ` not less than 16" o.c. vertically. b. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in two horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above the lintel and below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. N. Anchoring Masonry Work: 1. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown as specified. If not shown or specified, provide standard type for facing and back-up involved. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to comply with following: a. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. b. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections and metal compatibility unless otherwise indicated. C. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 16" o.c. horizontally. d. Bond intersecting walls with masonry units or provide anchors spaced 16" o.c. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaging completed work. B. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar. C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. D, At end of each day or shutdown period, protect all exposed walls by covering with a strong waterproof membrane, extending at least two feet down each side of wall and secured in place. E. Seal wall with anti -graffiti masonry sealer, submit for review. UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 7 3.4 POINTING AND CLEANING A. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample panels before proceeding with cleaning of entire masonry work. 3. Clean brick masonry by bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No. 20 Revised" using the following cleaner: a. Acidic cleaner approved by unit masonry manufacturer. 4. Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "Tek" bulletins. 5. Clean accessories of all excess mortar. B. On completion, point up all exposed masonry. Cut out defective joints and repoint where necessary. Reclean masonry as necessary. C. Remove white scum from masonry with Sure Klean White Scum Remover, PorSoCo, Inc., telephone 913-281-2700. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04300 - 8 SECTION 04340 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Work under this section includes the providing and installing of all reinforcing and grouting associated with reinforced unit masonry. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 404 Aggregate for Masonry Grout. B. ASTM C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. C. ASTM C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. D. ASTM C 615 Deformed and Plain Billet Steel for Concrete Reinforcement. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, size, quanity lengths and placement of reinforcement bars. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures." Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 04300 - Unity Masonry System, 1.8 Project Conditions and conform to these requirements under this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Refer to Unit Masonry section for masonry materials and accessories not included in this section. C 1997 Green Harvey Associates. Inc. unauthorized duplication Prohibited. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 1 2.2 B. Reinforcement Bars: Provide deformed bars, grade 60 KSI yield billet steel deformed bars complying with ASTM A 615, except as otherwise indicated. C. Mortar and Grout: 1. Portland Cenment ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Blended Hydraulic Cement ASTM C 595, Type IS, IP or S. 3. Masonry Cement ASTM C 91, Type S. 4. Hydrated Lime ASTM C 207, Type S. 5. Aggregates: a. Sand ASTM C 144. b. Coarse for Grout ASTM C 404, Size No. 8. 6. Water: Clear, clean and potable. 7. Mortar Color: a. All natural exposed to view mortar, as selected by the architect. b. All other locations: Natural grey. MIXES A. Masonry Grout Mix: Conform to ASTM C 476 and the following for coarse grout: 1. One part Portalnd Cement, 0 to 1/10 part hydrated lime, 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose sand, 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate. 2. Meet physical requirements for grout as specified in ASTM C 476. 3. Grout for filling of reinforced cells in concrete block walls shall have a strength of 2500 pounds per square inch in 28 days. B. Fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM Spec. C144 except for soundness and lightweight particles and shall have the following screen analysis: % passing No. 4 screen 100 % passing No. 8 screen 95 to 100 % passing No. 100 screen 25 maximum % passing No. 200 screen 10 maximum C. Course aggregate shall conform to ASTM Spec. C404 and shall have the following screen analysis: % passing No. 1/2 in. 100 % passing No. 3/8 in. 86 to 100 % passing No. 4 10 to 30 % passing No. 8 0 to 10 % passing No. 16 0 to 5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust mill scale, earth, ice or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 2 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Reinforcing: 1. Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing indicated. Support and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where vertical bars are shown in proximity, provide a clear distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or 1 inch (which ever is greater); 2. Splice reinforcement bars at intervals not to exceed 5 feet. Provide lapped splices. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire -tie. 3. Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcement as the work progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior face of walls and 1/2 inch at other locations. Lap units not less than 6 inches at ends. Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by manufacturer for continuity. 4. Anchor reinforced masonry walls to non -reinforced masonry where the intersect. B. Masonry: 1. Refer to Section 04300, Unit Masonry System for general installation requirements of unit masonry. 2. Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU). 3. Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of unit to a unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if not shown, provide 3/8 inch joints. 4. Walls: a. Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on the units in courses above and below, unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at corners and intersections. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for comers, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels, bond beams and other special conditions. b. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. C. Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use special units to allow for placement of continuous horizontal reinforcement bars. C. Grouting: 1. Use "Fine Grout" per ASTM C 476 for two-wythe walls with grout spaces less than 2 inches. a. Concrete masonry units provide minimum clear dimension of 2 inches and clear area of 8 square inches in vertical cores to be grouted. 2. Use "Coarse Grout" per ASTM C 476 for two-wythe walls with grout spaces of 2 inches or larger. a. Concrete masonry units with clear dimension of 2 inches or greater and clear area of 8 square inches or greater in vertical cores. 3. Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to requirements which follow. REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 3 4. Low -Lift Grouting: a. Construct low -lift masonry by placing reinforcement, laying masonry units and pouring grout as work progresses. b. Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required for splicing. Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar diameters nor 10 feet. C. Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if bond beam occurs below 5 feet height, stop pour at course below bond beam. Do not exceed a 12 inch pour height for two-wythe masonry walls. d. Lay masonry units prior to each grout pour, but do not construct more than 12 inches above maximum grout pour height in one exterior wythe and 4 inches above in other exterior wythe. Provide metal wall ties if required to prevent blowouts. e. Pour grout using chute or container with spout. Rod or vibrate grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1-1/2 inches below top course of pour. If poured in lifts, place from center to center of masonry courses. f. Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1-1/2 inches below bond beam course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before filling vertical cores above bond beam. g. Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimension indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for vertical reinforcement bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells. D. Formwork: 1. Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork. 2. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or concrete (if any). Brace, tie, and support as required to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 3. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during construction. 4. Allow not less than the following minimum time to elapse after completion of the member before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period. a. Seven days for arches. 5. Limit extent of masonry construction to sections which do not exceed the maximum pour requirements specified hereafter. Provide temporary dams or barriers to control horizontal flow of grout at ends of wall sections. Build dams full height of grout pour. If masonry units are used, do not bond into permanent masonry wythes. Remove temporary dams after completion of grout pour. END OF SECTION REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY SYSTEM 04340 - 4 SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of structural steel work is shown on the drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections and type of steel required. B. Structural steel is that work defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice" and as otherwise shown on the drawings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standard: Comply with the provisions of the following except as otherwise indicated. 1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any connections designed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings". 2. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" and including the "Commentary" and supplements thereto as issued. 3. AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 4. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code". 5. ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". B. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 2. Provide certification that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months. 3. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be the contractor's responsibility. e 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized duplication Prohibited. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1 C. Source Quality Control: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and test in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. 2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components which do not comply. D. Design of Members and Connections: 1. All details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at the site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 2. Promptly notify the architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings, Structural Steel: 1. Submit shop drawings prepared under the supervision of registered professional engineer including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, and details, schedules, procedures, and diagrams showing the sequence of erection. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 2. Architect's review of shop drawings will be for general consideration only. Compliance with requirements for materials fabrication and erection of structural steel is the contractor's responsibility. 3. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of the work. B. Steel beams shall be delivered to the jobsite in an upright position and shall be unloaded with a two point sling on a winch line from a crane or winch truck. Allowing steel members to fall from the bed of a truck will not be permitted. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Store in an upright position with blocking spaced not more than 15 feet on center. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36, except where other type steel is shown. B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy-46 ksi. C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A 501. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2 D. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A regular low- carbon steel bolts and nuts. 1. Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts, however use only hexagonal units for exposed connections. E. High -Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers, as follows. 1. Quenched and tempered medium -carbon steel bolts, nuts and washers, complying with ASTM A 325, F. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code. G. Structural Steel Primer Paint: Modified Alkyd; TT-P-86d, Type I and II. 2.2 FABRICATION: A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 1. Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. 2. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 3. Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces on members exposed in the final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects. B. Connections: 1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated. 2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 3. Provide high -strength threaded fasteners for all principal bolted connections, except where unfinished bolts are shown. 4. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for only the bolted connections of secondary framing members to primary members (including purling, girts, and other framing members taking only nominal stress) and for temporary bracing to facilitate erections. C. High -Strength Bolted Construction: 1. Install high -strength threaded fasteners in accordance with the AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts". D. Welded Construction: 1. Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. E. Holes for Other Work: 1. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. 2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3 L F. Splicing: 1. Splicing of beams shall be as shown on the drawings. All other splicing shall be made only with the written consent of the architect and/or engineer. When approved, copies of weld test shall be furnished to the architect and engineer. Splicing of columns will not be permitted under any circumstances. 2.3 SHOP PAINTING A. General: 1. Shop paint all structural steel work, except those members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. 2. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded or high -strength bolted with friction -type connectors. 3. Apply two coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first. B. Surface Preparation: 1. After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and splatter, slag, or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPQ as follows: a. SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or b. SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or C. SP-7 "Brush -Off Blast Cleaning". C. Painting: 1. Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and all exposed surfaces. 2.4 CORROSION PROTECTION A. After anchor bolt nuts are installed, throughly cover with roof mastic bolts, nuts, column base plate, and column one inch above the level of concrete. PART 3 EXAMINATION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Erector must examine the areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed, and notify the contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the erector. 3.2 ERECTION A. General: Comply with the AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice, and as specified. B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4 C. Comply with AISC Specifications: For bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. D. Do not enlarge holes in members by burning or by the use of drift pins, except in secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. E. Gas -Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors in the structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members which are not under stress, as acceptable to the architect. Finish gas -cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted. F. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. G. Cover with roof mastic all metal anchor bolts, nuts, column base plates, and columns that will be in contract with concrete. 3.3 SPLICING OF MEMBERS A. Generally, splicing of beams will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the architect. B. Any splicing proposed shall be clearly noted on the shop drawings and shall be initialled by the architect prior to fabrication. END OF SECTION STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS r A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to work of this Il Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal. 1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 03300 - Concrete Work: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. [ B. Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry System: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS A. - Section 09900 Painting: Paint finish. 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. [ B. ASTM A53 - Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. r C. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. D. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars. I� F. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. L G. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. fH. ASTM A386 - Zinc -Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. I. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. J. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. K. ASTM B 177 - Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 L. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. M. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. N. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prepare shop drawings under direct supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. B. Welders' Certificates: Submit under provisions of Section 01300, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. The contractor shall verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. It shall be the responsibility of the fabricator to accurately construct items to meet required dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. B. Plates: ASTM A283. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325. D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. E. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.3 FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items with two coats. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. l METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 l E. Obtain architect's approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise noted. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise noted. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION. INCLUDES A. Roof curbs and cants; blocking in wall and roof openings; wood furring and grounds; concealed wood blocking. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. B. Meet or exceed ASTM E 84 criteria. C. Meet or exceed UL 723:PR-S criteria. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA, WWPA. B. Fire resistant treated 2 x 6: NFPA. 2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded. B. Particleboard Roof Sheathing: ANSI A208.1 wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; sanded faces. C. Plywood Floor Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing Span Rating; sanded. o aut 97 Green Harvey Ar`b"""' Inc. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Plywood Underlayment: APA Rated Sheathing; sanded. B. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1; wood chips set with waterproof resin binder; sanded faces. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood locations, plain finish elsewhere. B. Die Stamped Connectors: Galvanized steel. C. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel. 2.5 WOOD TREATMENT A. Fire retardant: AWPA Treatment C20, Exterior Type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of 25 or less. 1. D-Blaze, Bowie -Sims -Prange Treating Corporation. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water -born preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FRAMING A. Erect wood framing members in accordance with applicable code. Place members level and plumb. Place horizontal members crown side up. B. Curb all roof openings except where curbs are provided. Construct curb members of single pieces per side. 3.2 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Site apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Treat site -sawn cuts. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on untreated wood in contact with cementitious materials roofing and related metal flashings. C. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. 3.3 CONCEALED GROUNDS A. Provide fire resistant concealed grounds in framing as required for secure anchoring of wall mounted building components. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Special fabricated cabinet units. B. New countertops on new cabinet units. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Grounds. C, Section 09900 - Painting: Finishing cabinet exterior and interior. 1.4 REFERENCES A. FS MM-L-736 - Lumber, Hardwood. B. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact. C. NWMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. D. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. E. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. F. PS 51 - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. G. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A, Perform work to custom quality in accordance with Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint details, accessory listings, and schedule of finishes. 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 1 C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit fire treated lumber certificate under provisions of Section 01300. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: ITEM SPECIES CUT Cabinet Frame White Pine Plain Sliced Exposed Frame Red Oak Plain Sliced B. Hardwood Lumber FS MM-L-736; graded in accordance with AWI; maximum moisture content of 6 percent; species and grade as follows: ITEM SPECIES CUT Exposed Frame Red Oak Plain Sliced C. Cabinet concealed wall grounds are to be fire treated lumber; submit certificate for review. Refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Wood Particleboard: Per AWI standard, composed of wood chips, made with high waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces, located as follows: ITEM: Shelving; Bulkheads; Non -exposed tops, bottoms and ends. B. Hardboard: PS 58; pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, smooth two sides, located as follows: ITEM: Drawer Bottoms; Cabinet Backs; Drawer Faces and Doors; Edges of shelves, drawers faces, and door faces. C. Softwood Plywood: PS 1; graded in accordance with AWI; core material of particleboard; species and cut as follows: ITEM: Underlayment D. Hardwood Plywood: PS 51; graded in accordance with AWI, core material of particleboard; type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cut as follows: ITEM FACE SPECIES CUT Door and Drawer Fronts Red Oak Rotary Drawer Construction White Pine Plain Sliced ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 2 2.3 ACCEPTABLE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A. Wilsonart Manufacturing. B. Formica. C. Nevamar. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.4 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: NWMA LD 3, GP - 50 general purpose type; color as listed in plastic laminate schedule at the end of this section. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. D. Computer Keyboard: Micro Computer Accessories, Inc. No. 620 with mouse tray No. 6295. E. Grommets and Sleeves: 2 inch round hole, similar to Valencia 44-N027384, black. 2.6 HARDWARE A. Shelf Standards and Rests: K & V No. 255AN and 256AN. B. Drawer and Door Pulls: Stanley No. 4484. C. Catches: Stanley No. SP46. D. Drawer Slides: K & V No. 8500, full extension, 150 lb. rated. E. Drawer Lock and Key: Stanley, finish to match cabinet hardware. F Hinges: Grass America No. 1203 with appropriate base plates. 2.7 FINISHES A. Submit full range of manufacturer's finishes for selection by architect. B. Provide examples to architect of all finishes under consideration. 2.8 FABRICATION A. All millwork is to be flush overlay construction per the Architectural Millwork Institute. B. Ship assembled casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. C. Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges to have less than 1/16 inch gap in any joint. Exposed edges to have hardwood edges. ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 3 D. Door and drawer fronts: 3/4 inch thick with hardwood edges. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. All field cuts through laminate are to have two coats of adhesive in order to minimize laminate deterioration at plumbing fixtures. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Make corners and joints hairline. Slightly bevel arrises. G. Cap exposed plastic laminate edges with material of same finish and pattern. H. Provide cutouts for grommets and sleeves, plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. All shelf standards are to be recessed flush with adjacent surface. All units with adjustable shelves, either open shelves or closed cabinets, are to have recessed metal standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify adequacy and location of backings and support framing members that are concealed within walls. B. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of conditions. 3.2 HARDWARE A. Provide six (6) drawer lock and key assemblies, location of locks to be selected by owner. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments at concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Carefully scribe casework which is against other building materials, leaving gaps of 1/32 inch maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. D. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. E. Do not cut equipment cord grommet through counter top until unit is completely installed and approved. Actual locations of grommets will be verified by architect prior to cutting hole. See millwork elevations for general locations. F. Provide concealed grounds in all wall framing areas to receive wall and base cabinets, refer to Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 4 f3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. I 3.5 Plastic Laminate Schedule PL-1 Wilsonart Graphite Nebula, No. 4623-60 or as changed by owner. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK 06400 - 5 SECTION 07213 BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Provide rigid cavity wall type insulation at masonry construction and unfaced batt insulation at exterior stud walls where shown on the drawings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04230: Reinforced Unit Masonry. B. Section 04300: Unit Masonry System. C. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by r-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick, measured by test method included in referenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are expressed by the temperature causing one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. L B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, f have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and l inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. I C. Contractor shall be an established firm regularly engaged in installation of wall insulations for the past five years. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84. B. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. C. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. ° 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. unamhorized duplication Prohibited. BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION 07213 - 1 D. Thermal Performance: ASTM C653. E. Acoustical Performance: ASTM C665. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. B. Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance values, including R-values (aged values for plastic insulations), densities, compression strengths, fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings, and similar properties. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation. All materials damaged from above instances will not be used and will be disposed of properly from the site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Rigid Insulation: 1. y Dow Chemical Corporation. 2. UCI Industries, Inc. 3. DiversiFoam Products, Inc. B. Batt Insulation: 1. Owens/Corning Corporation. 2. CertainTeed C. Substitutions: 1. In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Insulation above ceiling shall be 9 inch foil faced baits with a minimum R-valve of 30.0 at 75 degrees F mean temperature as indicated on the drawings. Flame spread of 0-25, smoke developed of 50. B. Insulation in exterior cavity walls shall be equal to DiversiFoam Products "Certifoam" rigid extruded polystyrene insulation. The insulation thickness shall be 2 inches and shall be 16 inches in width. Thermal Resistance ("R" value) shall be 10.0 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature. Insulation shall be compatible with dampproofing. Exterior surface will be coated with dampproofmg. C. Insulation in exterior stud walls to be Owens/Corning 6 inches foil faced bans with a minimum R- value of 19.0 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature as indicated on the drawings. Flame spread of 0- 25, smoke developed of 50. BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION 07213 - 2 D. Sound attenuation batts to be equal to Owens/Corning R-15 for 3 1/2 inch thick cavity, flame spread 0-25, smoke developed of 50. E. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation board shall be the type recommended by the insulation manufacturer, and complying with fire -resistance requirements. F. Mechanical Anchors shall be the type and size shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the type of application shown and condition of substrate. G. Felt: 30# felt expansion cover at the building expansion joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect cavity wall surfaces for mortar spillings and outcroppings. Surfaces will be smooth prior to installation insulation. B. Installation procedures constitutes acceptance of the substrate. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The installer must examine the substrate and the conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until substrate is satisfactory. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the particular conditions of installation in each case; including method of support or anchorage to the substrate, as appropriate for each application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to the project conditions, consult the manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with the work. C. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire surface to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with spray foam. D. Apply a single layer of insulation of the thickness indicated or the required thickness for the thermal value indicated, unless otherwise shown or required to make up the total thickness. E. Apply insulation units of the type shown to the substrate by the method indicated. If not otherwise indicated and except for units resting on horizontal surfaces, bond units to substrate with adhesive I or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. END OF SECTION BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION 07213 - 3 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work in this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide caulking in conjunction with interior painting operations and as otherwise indicated on drawings for interior caulking. B. Provide sealant where indicated on the drawings in conjunction with weather seals, and as otherwise noted. C. Perform all work required to complete the joint preparation, joint packing or filler, priming, caulking and sealing indicated by the drawings and specified herein. Furnish all supplementary items necessary. D. In fire rated partitions, install only fire resistant sealants. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System. B. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames. I C. Section 09900 - Painting, t 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Minimum two year's experience in applying sealants and approved by manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Representative: [ 1. Arrange for technical representative to be on project site to advise installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of materials and to check installation. f 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS L A. FS TT-S-00230C, Type II Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component. B. FS TT-S-001543A Sealing compound: Silicone Rubber Base. e 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 C. FS TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A Joint Sealant: Self Levelling. D. ASTM C834 Standard Specification for latex sealing compounds. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for sealant, backing, and related materials. 2. Samples: a. Color charts for selection by architect. b. Furnish samples of custom colors. 3. Certification: a. Letter of certification from manufacturer or certified test laboratory report that materials are chemically compatible with each other and with substrate. b. Letter from manufacture that certifies material's fire resistant qualities. 4. When requested by the architect, submit samples of cured sealants and a 6 inch long sample of each type of joint backup. 1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by the manufacturer. Store in a manner to protect materials from the weather. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Warrant, in writing, materials and workmanship against air and water leakage for a five-year period. B. Provide written warranty of materials fire resistance and accepted use in at least a one hour fire resistant assembly. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Pecora Chemical corporation. B. Sonneborn Building Products. C. W.R. Grace and Company. D. General Electric Company. E. Products Research and Chemical Corporation. F. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2 2.2 MATERIALS A. Polysulfide (Type I): 1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self -leveling) or Type 2 (nonsag) as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Color: As selected by architect. 3. Acceptable products: a. Synthacalk GC-5, Pecora Corp. b. 350, PRC. C. Sonolastic, Sonneborn-Contech, Inc. B. Chlorosulfonated Polyurethane (Type 2) 1. One part conforming to FS TT-S-230C. 2. As selected by architect. 3. Acceptable products: a. Synthacalk, Pecora. C. Polyurethane (Type 3): 1. Two-part conforming to FS TT-S-0000227E, Class A, Type I or II. 2. Color: As selected by architect. 3. Acceptable products: a. NR-200, Pecora. b. No. 200, PRC. C. Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant, Sonneborn-Contech. d. THC-900/901, Tremco. D. Polyurethane (Type 4): 1. One -part conforming to FS TT-S-000230C, Class A, Type II. 2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect. 3. Acceptable products: a. No. 6000, PRC. b. NP 1, Sonneborn - Contech. C. Dymonic, Tremco. E. Silicone (Type 5): 1. One part rubber based silicone conforming to FS TT-S-001543, Class A, Type I. 2. Color: Custom color as selected by architect. 3. Acceptable products: a. 790 Building Sealant, Dow Corning. b. Silproof, General Electric. C. Proglaze, Tremco. F. Acrylic, Solvent Cure (Type 6): 1. One -part, FS TT-S-00230. 2. Acceptable products: a. Unicrylic, Pecora. b. Permacryl, Schnee -Moorhead Chemicals, Inc. C. Mono, Tremco Manufacturing Company. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 G. Nondrying, Nonskinning (Type 7): 1. One -part sealing compound. 2. Acceptable products: a. GC-55, Noncuing, Goal Chemical. b. BR-96, Pecora. C. Curtain Wall Sealant, Tremco. H. Bitumen Impregnated Sealant (Type 8): 1. Precompressed bitumen impregnated foam joint sealant. 2. Size: As recommended by manufacturer for joint condition as rain seal. 3. Acceptable product: Emseal compressed, Emseal Corporation. I. Backer Rod: Closed cell expanded polyurethane or polyethylene "Denver" foam, compatible with sealant; sized and shaped to control depth of sealant; and to maintain 20% to 50% compression of material. J. Joint Cleaners and Primers: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. K. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape. L. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape. M. Sealant Tape: 1. Compressible adhesive -cohesive tape of cross -linked butyl polyisobutylene rubber that accommodates variations and movement, sized as necessary to allow for joint movement of + or - 25%. 2. Acceptable product: PTI 606, Protective Treatments, Inc. N. Expansion Joint Filler: 1. Closed cell polyethylene compatible with sealant. 2. Acceptable product: Sonoflex F, Sonneborn. 3. Fire resistant to be used in at least a one hour fire rating classification. 2.3 MIXING A. Mix components in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine all surfaces to receive sealant and report all conditions not acceptable. Installation shall be deemed as acceptance of the surface. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean all surfaces and joints thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, water surface, dirt, frost, old caulking material, and previously applied paint or primer. B. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant or caulk manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4 C. Remove loose mill scale from steel surfaces. Remove dirt, oil, or grease by solvent cleaning and wipe surfaces. All surfaces must be clean and dry. Any protective coating on building materials that will impair sealant bond shall be removed. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Sealants: 1. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding preparation, priming, application life, and application procedure. 2. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. 3. apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size or other appropriate means. Provide sufficient pressure to completely fill joints. 4. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. B. Caulking: I. Caulking: Apply caulking joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface. Apply caulking with a pressure gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and assure good adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before paint is allowed. C. Joint Size: I. Sealant and Caulking: Depth equal to 1/3 times joint width or as recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess caulking or sealant materials and smears from adjacent surfaces as work progresses. B. On non -porous surfaces excess uncured sealant shall be removed with a solvent moistened cloth immediately. On porous surfaces excess sealant should be allowed to cure overnight, then removed by lightly wirebrushing or sanding. All adjacent surfaces shall be clean and free from stains. C. Remove all debris resulting from these operations from the site. 3.5 SCHEDULE A. Interior and Exterior Joints Subject to Movement (Not Including Traffic): Type I, 2, 4, or 5 at Contractor's option and as recommended by manufacturer for joint condition and sealant color. B. Interior and Exterior Horizontal Joints Subject to foot and Vehicular Traffic: Type 2, self -leveling. C. Interior Horizontal and Vertical Joint Not Subject to Movement (Not Including Traffic): Type 6. D. In contact with roofing and waterproofing materials: Type 3 or 4, low modulus, unmodified. E. Unexposed window joints: Type 7. F. Interior fire resistant rating of at least a one hour rated assembly subjected to minimal movement: Type 2. G. Secondary seal and exterior brick expansion joint secondary seals: Type S. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 SECTION 08111 STEEL DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The extent of hollow metal doors and frames is shown on the drawings and schedules; all shall be custom hollow metal work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. C. Section 04230 - Reinforced Unit Masonry D. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. E. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. F. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames. G. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware. H. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide hollow mental doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. In addition to other specified requirements, comply with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI-100), for the following classifications: 1. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, Minimum 16-gage faces. B. Comply with latest adopted version of the Texas Accessibility Standards and Americans with Disabilities Act. 1.6 SUBMITTALS 1997 Green Harvey Architects. Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited. STEEL DOORS 08111 - 1 A. With manufacturer's standard details and specifications for steel doors and frames, submit shop drawings showing application to project, as required. B. Provide a written warranty letter per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that installed door components comply with TAS and/or ADA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Hollow Metal: 1. Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co. 2. Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel. 3. Tex -Steel Corporation. 4. Hol-O-Met, Inc. 5. Superior Door and Sash Company. 6. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Metal steel doors and frames; hot -rolled, pickled and oiled per ASTM A 569 and A 568; cold -rolled per ASTM A 366 and A 568. B. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra -heavy duty, Model 2, Minimum 16-gage faces. C. Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard units. Use galvanized items for units built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp or buckle. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. B. Prepare steel doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping, complying with ANSI A 115 "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware". 1. Reinforce units to receive surface -applied finish hardware to be field applied. 2. Locate finish hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, per DHI "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware". C. Shop paint surfaces of doors and frame units, including galvanized surfaces, using manufacturer's standard baked -on rust -inhibitive primer. D. Doors: Comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated, for materials quality, metal gages, and construction details. E. Frames: Comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated, for materials quality, metal gages, and construction details. STEEL DOORS 08111 - 2 i 1. Provide standard hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings as indicated. Frames 6 feet wide and under shall be constructed of 16 gage material. [ 2. Prepare frames to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers of double -swing frames. 3. Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of hardware cutouts where installed in concrete, masonry or plaster openings. 4. Protect inside faces of frames in plaster or masonry wall construction which are placed with anti -freeze additives, using high -build fibered asphalt emulsion coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow -metal units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final shop drawings. Fit doors to frames and floors with clearances specified in SDI-100. [ B. Finish hardware is specified in Section 08700. r 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEANING IL A. Prime coat touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of fprime coat and apply touch-up paint of compatible air -frying primer. l B. Final adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION STEEL DOORS 08111 -3 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood doors fire rated and non -rated. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, cutouts for glazing. B. Samples: Submit two of door veneer, 12x12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, color, and finish. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with the following: 1. ANSI/NWWDA I.S.1. 2. Fire Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152. 3. Installed Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Interior Doors: Two years. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. C. Provide a written warranty letter per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that installed door components comply with TAS and/or ADA. wut Green Harvey Architects, Inc. WOOD DOORS 08210 - 1 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR TYPES A. Manufacturers: 1. Weyerhaeuser. 2. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 3. Truline. B. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core particleboard construction (ANSI A208); fire rated as indicated. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Core (Solid, Non -Rated): ANSI/NWWDA, Type solid wood block core. 2.3 FLUSH DOOR FACING A. Wood Veneer: ANSI/NWWDA Custom grade; Red Oak wood, plain sliced with random match grain, for transparent finish. B. Adhesive: ANSI/NWWDA, Type I. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Glass Stops: Rolled steel type conform to UL requirements. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate non -rated doors in accordance with ANSI/NWWDA I.S.1 requirements. B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with ANSI/NWWDA I.S.1 and to UL requirements. Attach fire rating label to door edge. C. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement blocking in place. D. Factory machine doors for finish hardware. E. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings. 2.6 FINISH A. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. WOOD DOORS 08210 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements. B. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. C. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. D. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION WOOD DOORS 08210 - 3 SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 11.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Complete hardware for new doors. B. Butts and hinges, locks and latch sets, closers, push/pulls, trim units and silencers. C. Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on the drawings and/or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary and required for their completion. Any item of finish hardware not specifically mentioned, but which is necessary for proper completion of the work shown on the Drawings shall be provided without additional cost to owner. Any omissions shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening; otherwise the Drawings and Specifications will be considered complete. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. C. Section 06400 - Architectural Millwork. D. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames. E. Section 08800 - Glazing. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act, 36 CFR. B. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute. 1 D. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association. E. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute. F. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. r G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. l H. SDI - Steel Door Institute 0 1997 Green Harvey Architectsm Unauthorized duplication prohibited. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 1 I. ANSI A115.2 - Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4 inch Doors. J. ANSI A115.9 - Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single Acting. K. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and Hinges. L. ANSI A156.2 - Locks and Lock Trim. M. A156.4 - Door Controls (Closers). N. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural Door Trim. O. ANSI A 156.7 - Template Hinges. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this section with other sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Hardware subcontractor shall examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of hardware quantities required. Should any particular door or item be omitted in any scheduled hardware group, provide such door or item with hardware similar to that required for similar conditions on the project. Locks, bolts, hinges, pulls, knobs shown on the plans for non -factory manufactured cabinet and casework shall be included in the Division of Finish Hardware. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three year's experience. B. Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial and institutional door hardware with five year's documented experience. C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of the section. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. B. Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01300. Resubmittals will be required until complete architectural approval is obtained. B. Indicate location and mounting heights of each type of hardware. Show required mortising and internal reinforcing of metal products. C. Provide product data on specified hardware. D. Submit keying diagrams to show grandmaster, master, etc. level of hierarchy. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 2 E. Submit proposed replacement levers, finish, function, and example. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. C. Lost or stolen hardware shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Replace all items lost or stolen with identical items. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. B. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secure area. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS LA. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. I 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide a written warranty per Section 01700, 1.8, on business letterhead stating that installed door components comply with TAS and/or ADA. B. Provide warranties for all hardware furnished under this division to the general contractor for transmittal to the architect. Warranties shall be for a period of one (1) year (five [5] years for closer) from date of owner acceptance, against defects in material and workmanship of the merchandise. PART2 PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS I2.1 A. Locksets and Latches: Sargent. B. Hinges: Stanley; McKinney; Hager. C. Closers: Sargent; LCN. D. Exit Devices: Sargent. E. Kickplates, stops, and silencers: Trimco; Ives; Triangle Brass; Quality Hardware. F. Smoke seals: Pemko; National Guard Products, Inc. G. Thresholds: Pemko; National Guard Products, Inc. H. Cover Plates: National Guard Products, Inc. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 3 I. Push/Pulls: Rockwood, Trimco. 2.2 STYLE A. All hardware components shall match throughout the facility in finish, style, and function. B. Style to be Sargent 8100 series, heavy duty, with Sargent LNH lever. C. Provide a knurled grip or similar, acceptable texture on levers of doors leading to a potentially hazardous situation for a physically or visually challenged person; ie, mechanical rooms, stairs, etc. 2.3 KEYING A. Door Locks: 1. Master keyed. 2. Grand master key system. 3. Coordinate key system with owner. B. Supply two keys for each lock. C. Coordinate new keying system with architect and owner. 2.4 FINISHES AND STYLE A. Finishes are identified in the schedule at end of this section. If not identified, finish is to be recommended. Submit for architect's approval. B. New items are to match in style and function as closely as possible. Lockset knobs, keying system, cylinder pins, and fmishes are to match. Submit for architect's approval. 2.5 EXIT DEVICES A. Sargent 1040 series, smooth mechanism case, designed for 1 3/4" thick hollow metal doors. B. Devices are intended for door openings without a mullion. C. Provide devices with concealed vertical rods. 2.6 PUSH, PULLS A. Use the model listed in the hardware schedule as reference, match the existing Push and Pulls if different than specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 4 C. The Owner reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection by a representative of the referenced organization to determine that the work of this Section has been performed in accordance with the specified requirements. D. In the event such inspection determines that the work of this Section does not comply with the specified requirements, immediately remove the non -complying items and immediately replace them with items complying with the specified requirements, all at no additional cost to the Owner, and reimburse the Owner for the cost of the inspection. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of SDI, NAAMM, AWI, ANSI/NFPA 80, BHMA and DHI. B. The contractor shall install all finished hardware plump, square, true and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, using the best practices as approved by architect. Hardware shall be fitted and operated prior to painting, then removed and painting completed before final installation. All hardware must be thoroughly cleaned, free from mars and blemishes and in perfect operating condition when turned over to the owner. Damaged or malfunctioning hardware will not be acceptable. C. No extra costs will be allowed to facilitate proper installation of any hardware. The general contractor shall be responsible for the proper fabrication of all materials and work to receive hardware. D. Finish hardware shall be furnished with all necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size use and long life and shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. These fastenings shall be furnished where necessary with expansion shield, security bolts, toggle bolts or other approved anchors according to the material to which it is applied and recommended by the manufacturer. All hardware fastened to concrete shall be furnished with machine screws and lead shields. Extension flushbolts shall be edge mounted in all cases. Wrought box strikes shall be furnished where strikes are mortised into wood. Strikes shall have sufficiently extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch -bolts, but no more than necessary. Strikes for pairs of doors shall have 1" lips to center. All backsets of locks and latches shall be 2-3/4" from I the door edge unless ot:1terwise indicated. E. Hardware for fire doors shall conform to the requirements for NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. In case of conflict between the type of hardware specified in these specifications or the type required for fire protection, materials of equal quality and design without additional cost to owner, required by NFPA shall be furnished. 3.3 HANDICAP ACCESSIBILITY PROVISIONS A. Door Hardware: Handles, knobs, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices on accessible doors shall be mounted no higher than 48 inches above the floor or ground surface and shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or severe twisting to operate. The force required to activate door hardware shall be no greater than five lbf. Designs include lever -operated mechanisms, push -type mechanisms and U-shaped handles. When sliding doors are fully open, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from both sides. Doors to hazardous areas such as loading platforms, boiler rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, and to other areas that might be dangerous to a blind person, shall be made identifiable to the touch by a textured surface on the door handle, knob, pull or other operating hardware. This textured surface maybe made by knurling or roughening or by a material applied to he contact surface. Such textured surfaces shall not be provided for emergency exit doors or any doors other than those to hazardous areas. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 5 B. Door Closer: If a door has a closer, then the sweep period of the closer shall be adjusted so that from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least three (3) seconds to move to an open position of approximately 12 degrees. C. Door Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling open a door shall comply with this paragraph. For hinges doors, the force shall be applied perpendicular to the door at the door opener or 30 inches from the hinged side, whichever is farther from the hinge. For sliding or folding doors, the force shall be applied parallel to the door at the door pull or latch. 1. Exterior hinged doors shall not exceed 8.5 lbf. Slight increases in opening force shall be allowed where 8.5 lbf is insufficient to compensate for air pressure differentials. 2. Sliding doors, folding doors, and interior hinged doors shall not require a force exceeding five lbf. 3. Fire doors may be adjusted to meet the minimum opening force allowed by the governing authority or applicable building code. D. Thresholds: The height of any floor level change plus the height of any applied threshold at doorway sills shall no exceed 1/2" and shall be beveled with a slope no greater than 1" in 2". E. Conform to latest adopted version of the Americans with Disabilities Act and Texas Accessibility Standards criteria for positioning, operating, and opening force requirements. In case of conflict materials f equal quality and design required by ADA or TAS shall be provided. 3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS A. Locks, latches: Finish floor to C/L of knobs, 40-5/16" B. Deadlocks: Finish to C/L of cylinder, 48" C. Push/Pull Plates: Finish floor to C/L of plate, 46" D. Flushbolts: C/L of bolt face to top (and bottom) edge of floor, 12" E. Exit Devices: Per template and installation instructions, mounting heights shall be adjusted to center exit rail on appropriate door rail. F. Closer, O/H Holders: Per template and installation instructions. G. Stops: To protect doors and hardware from contact with parts of the building or other conflicting doors. H. Butt Hinges: 1. Top anchor butt - per template instructions; 2. Top butt hinge - top edge of butt leaf to rabbet, 5" 3. Bottom butt hinge - bottom edge of butt leaf to finish floor, 10" 4. Intermediate butt hinge - equal distant between top and bottom butts. 3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND MAINTENANCE A. Within thirty (30) days after Owner Acceptance of the Project, the subcontractor shall meet with the Owner's maintenance foreman and thoroughly instruct him in the care and adjustment of all movable hardware furnished under this division. Provide him with a Manufacturer's Parts List for all locks, exits and closer, a Bound Care and Adjustment Manual, and an adjustment tool for each type of adjustable hardware. Included shall be a copy of an approved Hardware Schedule. FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 6 3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW-1 DOORS MARKED 1 EACH TO HAVE: 3 BUTTS TA2714 US lOB 4.5 X 4.5 MCKINNEY 1 LOCKSET 8204 LWIL US IOB SARGENT 1 STOP W302PT US 10B QUALITY 3 SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO HW-2 DOORS MARKED 2, 5 EACH TO HAVE: 3 BUTTS TA2714 US IOB 4.5 X 4.5 MCKINNEY 1 LOCKSET 8205 LW1L US10B SARGENT 1 STOP W302PT US10B QUALITY 3 SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO HW-3 DOORS MARKED 6 EACH TO HAVE: 6 BUTTS TA2714 US10B 4.5 X 4.5 MCKINNEY 1 LOCKSET 8215 LWIL US IOB SARGENT 2 STOPS W302PT US10B QUALITY 6 SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO 2 FLUSH BOLTS 3917 US lOB TRIMCO HW-4 DOORS MARKED 3, 4 EACH TO HAVE: 4 BUTTS TA2714 US10B 4.5 X 4.5 MCKINNEY 1 LOCKSET 8215 LW1L US10B SARGENT 1 DUTCHBOLT 204 US 10B QUALITY 1 DOOR HOLDER 195B US IOB QUALITY 2 STOPS W302PT US10B QUALITY 6 SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO 1 KICKPLATE 10" x 2" LDW US10B QUALITY END OF SECTION FINISH HARDWARE 08700 - 7 SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass and glazing for sections referencing this section for products and installation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. B. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by r Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. I B. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in l Buildings. ` C. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. D. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. E. FGMA - Glazing Manual. r F. FGMA - Sealant Manual. IL G. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. H. FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent Release Type. I. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compounds, Synthetic -Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically Curing. J. FS TT-S-01543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base. C 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. GLAZING 08800 - 1 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. K. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Mental) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for Channel or Stop Glazing). L. Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Glass and glazing materials of the section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with 1985 U.B.C. in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data on glass types specified: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling, or installation requirements. C. Product data on glazing compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: 1. Submit 2 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected. 2. Submit 12" x 12" piece of each glass indicated. E. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Indicate special precautions required. F. Manufacturer's certificate: Certify that glass meets or exceeds specified requirements. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings. B. Actual site measurements are the responsibiity of the contractor. GLAZING 08800 - 2 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01040. B. Coordinate the work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent work. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. IB. Warranty: Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS [ 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. PPG Industries, Inc. B. Ford Glass Division C. ASG Industries D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 2.2 MATERIALS - GLASS A. Laminated Glass - Clear 1. Type: Clear plastic laminated glass. 2. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 3. Conformance: ASTM C1172-91. 4. Acceptable Manufacture: PPG Industries, Inc. B. Wire Glass - Clear 1. Type: Clear polished wire glass. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Conformance: Uniform Building Code Standard No. 43-4, ASTM 1036. 4. Acceptable Manufacturer: Equal to Pilkington diamond pattern. C. Tempered Glass - Tinted 1. Type: Fully tempered light. Equal to PPG Solarcool Bronze (the supplier shall verify that this glass appearance at the existing windows that are to remain at the exterior south wall). 2. Light Transmittance: 21 % 3. Light Reflectance: 35 % 4. Shading Coefficient: 0.45 5. Thickness: 1/8 inch 6. Conformance: ASTM 1048-85, Quality q3. D. Insulating Glass Units 1. Manufacturers - sealed insulating glass materials a. PPG Industries, Glass Div. b. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. C. Ford Motor Co., Glass Div. d. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. GLAZING 08800 - 3 2. Sealed Insulating Glass Materials a. Insulated Glass Units (Type SG -A): ASTM E774 and E773; double pane with outer pane of 1/4 inch clear glass, inner pane of 1/4 inch clear glass, interpane space purged dry hermetic air; total unit thickness of 1 inch. 2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Shall conform to ASTM C669 and as required by the glazing manufacturer. B. Butyl Sealant (Type GC-B): FS TT-S-001657; Shore A hardness of 10-20 black color; non - skinning. C. Acrylic Sealant (Type GC-C): FS TT-S-00230, Type II, Class A; single component; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25; color as selected. D. Polysulphide Sealant (Type GC-D): FS TT-S-00227, Glass A Type II; two component; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25; color as selected. E. Polyurethane Sealant (Tupe GC-E): FS TT-S-00230, Type II -non -sag, Class A; as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Silicone Sealant (Type GC-F): FS TT-S-01543, Class A; single component; chemical solvent curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25 color as selected. 2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the, glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. D. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinyl chloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; color: black. E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Provide testing and analysis reports of glass under provisions of Section 01400. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify prepared openings under provisions of Section 01040. B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. GLAZING 08800 - 4 C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Remove all evidence of existing putty glazing from existing steel frames scheduled to be reglazed. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with referenced FGMA standards and instructions of manufacturers of glass, glazing sealants, and gaskets, to achieve airtight and watertight performance, and to minimize breakage. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during installation and discard pieces with edge damage that could affect glass performance. C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. C. Remove labels after work is complete. D. Clean glass. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished work under provisions of Section 01500. B. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. C. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. D. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. E. Remove and replace glass which is broker, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. END OF SECTION GLAZING 08800 - 5 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS r A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Metal stud wall and wall furring. 1 B. Metal channel ceiling framing. C. Gypsum board. D. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for support of toilet accessories. r L B. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames. C. Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings: Ceiling Furrdown Construction. [ D. Section 09900 - Painting: surface finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. B. ANSI/ASTM C79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board. C. ANSI/ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. D. ANSI/ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. E. ANSI/ASTM C646 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Sheet Material to Light Gage Steel Studs. F. ANSI/ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board. ° 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 1 G. ANSI/ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. H. GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings. I. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fire Rating Wall Requirements: 1 hour in accordance with UL 1988 listed assembly No. U465. B. Fire Rating Sub -ceiling Requirements: 1 hour in accordance with UL 1988 listed assembly No. G501. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with three years' documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for fire rated assemblies 1. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL. 2. Fire Rated Ceilings: Listed assembly by UL. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape decorative finish, and accessories. B. Submit two samples of predecorated gypsum board 12 x 12 inch in size, one illustrating a sand texture finish and one illustrating an orange peal texture. Selection will be made by the architect. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. United States Gypsum Co. - Gypsum Panels. B. Dietrich - metal stud system. C. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products: 1. Gold Bond Products, Inc. 2. Redman Industries Inc. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Interior Framing 1. Studs and Tracks: ANSI/ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 3 5/8" by 25 gage thick, 'C' shape. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 2 2. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ANSI/ASTM C645; 3 5/8" by 25 gage. B. Exterior Framing: 1. Studs and Tracks: ANSI/ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 6" by 20 gage thick, 'C' shape. f 2. Furring, Framing, and Accessories: ANSI/ASTM C645; 6" by 20 gage. ` C. Fasteners: ANSI/ASTM C1002 [ D. Adhesive: ANSI/ASTM C557 and as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.3 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Standard Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length, ends square cut, tapered edges. B. Gypsum Board for Backup: ANSI/ASTM C36; 3/8 inch thick, ends square cut, tapered edges. C. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ANSI/ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. D. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ANSI/ASTM C36; 5/8 inch minimum thickness, edges 'V' cut for r Il resisting water infiltration, ends square cut, 24 inch width by maximum permissible length. 2.4 ACCESSORIES IA. l Comer Beads: Metal equal to Dur-A-Bead #101 by United States Gypsum. B. Edge Trim: Metal equal to No. 200-A by United States Gypsum. C. Control Joints: Metal equal to No. 093 by United States Gypsum. r D. Joint Materials: ANSI/ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and Ifasteners. PART 3 EXECUTION I3.1 INSPECTION ` A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as instructed by l the manufacturer. IB. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.2 METAL STUD INSTALLATION C. Install studding in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C754. D. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center. E. Partition Heights: To minimum 6 inches above suspended ceilings. Install additional bracing for partitions extending above ceiling. I GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 3 F. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. G. Blocking: Nail wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. H. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work placed in or behind partition framing. 3.3 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION A. Erect free-standing metal stud framing tight to masonry and plaster walls, attached by adjustable furring brackets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions B. Erect furring studs vertically. Secure in place at maximum 16" on center. C. Space furring studs maximum 16' on center. D. Install thermal insulation batts between studs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with GA 201 and GA 216. B. Coordinate location of h�mgers with other work. C. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above -ceiling work. D. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past each end of openings. E. Laterally brace entire suspension system. 3.5 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items with or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 4 B. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at: 1. Metal framing: two beads. 2. Face layer. 3. Calk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, ductwork, rough -in boxes, and all other wall penetrations. 3.6 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 201 and GA 216. B. Erect single layer of gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. D. Erect exterior gypsum sheathing horizontally, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. E. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. F. Treat cut edges and holes in gypsum sheathing with sealant, or tape. G. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as directed. H. Place corner beads at external comers as indicated. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. I. Install concealed grounds in wall framing where shown or required, if not shown, for mounting of surface hardware. Concealed grounds are not to be obvious when gypsum board system is fuushed. 3.7 JOINT TREATMENT A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Erect pre -decorated gypsum board vertically, with exposed batten fastening system. D. Erect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install No. 093 control joints in the interior face of gypsum board partitions opposite all exterior Lexpansion joints. Install control joints at other locations as directed. 3.8 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 5 t SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 GENERAL NOTES A. This contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all acoustical ceiling work as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. This contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installation of all accessories required for the completion of the work. B. See reflected ceiling plan for locations of electrical and mechanical items related to the acoustical ceilings. Cooperate with electrical and mechanical contractors to insure a first class appearance in the completed work. 1.3 RELATED SECTION A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.4 COOPERATION A. This contractor shall consult and cooperate with trades whose work precedes and follows ceiling installation to permit orderly procedure in executing work under this contract. Installation of tile shall not start until foundation work to receive the tile has been obtained to proceed. The contractor shall give the architect advance notices for such operations. B. The contractor shall inspect personally all surfaces to receive material and shall report to the architect any defects or conditions which would affect his installation. C. When crown molding is included in project, this contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with the carpentry contractor to see that a uniform border is maintained around the ceiling area. 1.5 WARRANTY A. This contractor shall furnish a written warranty that the work under this division shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of his work, and all other work damaged thereby, which becomes defective during the term of the warranty. B. The following shall be judged as defective work: loosening, buckling, undue shrinkage, warping, cracking, settling, chipping, spotting, and loss of acoustical properties of material. ° aut Green Harvey ionpr prohibited. SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 1 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1.6 SUBMITTAL A. Submit to the architect for approval four sets of manufacturer's literature describing the ceiling boards and suspension system proposed for the project. PART 2 PRODUCT 2.1 MATERIALS A. Ceiling board shall be 24 x 48 x 5/8 inches square edged, random fissured mineral fiber with an NRC of at least .50 to .60, STC of 35 to 39, Class A rating, and a white color coating. USG Interiors, Inc. - OMNI Amstrong World Industries, Inc. - MINABOARD B. Exposed suspension system shall be equal to DONN, Centricitee system at Type I ceiling and Meridian at Type II ceiling, both shall be white enameled steel. Main beams shall be generally spaced at 48 inches on center except where light fixture locations dictate a 24 inch spacing. Use 48 inch cross tees and 24 inch sub cross tees. Wall angle shall be white enameled steel. Provide an intermediate -duty classification. E. Existing ceiling tiles that are to be replaced due to damage shall match the existing size, texture, color, and pattern as much as possible. The architect shall determine if new panels match the existing panels; those found not to match shall be replaced. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXPOSED SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. The contractor shall employ workmen who are experienced in the erection of the types of ceilings specified and shall maintain competent supervision of the work at all times. B. Erect runner level and true to the elevation shown on the drawings. Start channels a minimum of 1 foot from walls, and space 4 feet on center thereafter. Where splices occur in channels, use special splice bars as furnished with system specified. C. Lay out ceiling work symmetrically in the various rooms with no less than one-half tile at the walls. Cut tile accurately around electrical outlets. D. Upon completion of the work, all tile shall be cleaned and left free form defects of any kind. With the approval of the architect, small abrasions, etc., may be touched up with paint. E. In general, lighting fixtures of fluorescent type shall be suspended directly on the runner bars. Where fixture centers between two runner bars, both shall be main runner bars. See reflected ceiling plans for fixture locations. F. The use of wall angles to support more than 1 foot of suspended acoustical board ceilings will not be permitted. 3.2 HANGERS SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 A. Hanger wires shall be #12 soft annealed wire. Hanger wires shall be plumb and taut in the completed work. Slanting of hanger wires will not be permitted unless an equal and opposite hanger wire is installed to offset the thrust of the original wire hanger. This may be done only with the expressed permission of the architect. B. Where hanger wires occur directly under ductwork or other overhead obstructions, provide a trapeze of 1-1/2 inch channel iron. Install regular hanger wire at proper location along the length of trapeze. C. The use of bridging angles spanning between bar joists is expressly forbidden for attachment of hanger wires for supporting ceiling suspension systems. D. Hanger wires shall be attached to the bottom chords of bar joists or to special scissor clips attached to steel subpurlins supporting the roof deck. E. Where acoustical board ceilings occur below concrete structural members provide power driven studs with eyes into vertical face of concrete joists. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF TILES A. Contractor shall only install ceiling tiles in which a building system is anchored to or through the tile in order to complete the installation of the building system. r 1. Once Phase I is complete and systems are operational, the contractor shall schedule with IL the architect a pre-fmal building system walk through. 2. Do not install ceiling tiles that do not support a building system component, building r systems are to be visible. B. Phase II: After pre -final walk through and all corrective work is completed, install balance of ceiling tiles, 1. Complete ceiling system is to be installed prior to final project walk through. 3.4 EXTRA TILE A. Upon completion of the work furnish to the owner one unopened carton of each type of acoustical board installed in the project. END OF SECTION SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 SECTION 09680 CARPET PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent, location, and details of each type of carpeting is indicated on the drawings, finish schedule, and as specified herein. B. Work of this section includes furnishing and installing carpeting, adhesives, and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' product literature and installation instructions for each type of carpeting material and installation accessory required. Include method of installation for each type of substrate. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading and flame resistance characteristics. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing carpet layout and seaming diagrams, clearly indicating carpet direction, and types of edge strips. Show columns, doorways, enclosing walls/partitions, built-in cabinets and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation details at any special condition. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following: 12 inch long samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in carpet installation with not less than five years of experience in installation of carpeting similar to that required for this project. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees F. B. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements. C 1997 Green Harvey Architects. Inc. CARPET 09680 - 1 Unauthorized duplication prohibited. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence carpet installation with other work to avoid the possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor, installer and the Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace carpeting which fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the contractor under the contract documents. Warranty period is two years after the date of substantial completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carpet Schedule: Detailed carpet construction, pattern and color requirements for each type of carpet as indicated on the Floor Plan and in the Room Finish Schedule of the Drawings and as specified hereinafter. B. Floor Carpet: Mohawk Commercial Carpet - Supertron Lees Commercial Carpet - Faculty IV 2.2 CARPET ACCESSORIES A. Carpet Edge Guard Nonmetallic: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber carpet edge guard of size and profile selected and with minimum 2 inch wide anchorage flange; colors selected by Architect from among standard colors available within the industry. B. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant, non -staining type as recommended by carpet or cushion manufacturer and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. C. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and buttering out edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. D. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, cushions and other carpeting products and selected by installer to meet project circumstance and requirements. CARPET 09680 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRE -INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions or rough areas using material recommended by carpet or adhesive manufacturer. Notify contractor in writing of major conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check concrete surfaces to ensure no dusting through installed carpet; apply sealer where required to prevent dusting. C. Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendation for seam locations and directions of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doors, center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways. 2. Extend carpet under open -bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. 3. Provide cut-outs where required and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. 4. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. B. Expansion Joints: Where applicable, do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting; provide for joint movement. C. Glue -Down Installation 1. Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butter cuts with seaming cement. 2. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll entire carpet area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove and dispose of debris and usable scraps. B. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Remove any protruding face yarn using sharp scissors. C. Contractor to protect carpeting without deterioration or damage until time of substantial completion and owner acceptance. END OF SECTION CARPET 09680 - 3 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Surface preparation. B. Surface finish schedule. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. B. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Frames. C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years documented experience. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data on all finishing products. B. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. 0 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. PAINTING 09900 - 1 Unauthorized duplication prohibited C. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled, after color selection. D. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.8 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide one field sample panel, 12 inches long by 12 inches wide, illustrating special texture, and finish. B. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labelled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. D. Container labelling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45' F and a maximum of 90' F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 55° F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 55' F for interiors; 650 F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65' F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 50 footcandles measured mid -height at substrate surface. 1.11 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide two gallon containers of each color and surface texture to owner. B. Label each container with color, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label. PAINTING 09900 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT A. Glidden Coatings and Resins Division of SCM Corporation. B. PPG Industries, Inc. Coatings and Resins Division. C. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc. D. Sherwin Williams Company. E. Monarch Paint Company. F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalysed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. B. Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners, and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of section for surface finish schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3 A INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. I 3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. l D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. I 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. PAINTING 09900 - 3 B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to completely and thoroughly dry. H. Plaster Surfaces: Fill h<<irline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. I. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. J. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items. K. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. L. Concrete Paving Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. M. Hollow Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. PAINTING 09900 - 4 i 3.4 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than proceeding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. H. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. I. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. J. Apply new paint as specified on new and renovated existing surfaces. The entire renovated surface shall be painted, not just the repaired portion. Renovated surfaces shall be painted from floor to ceiling, corner to corner, or break in surface plane. K. Repainting the entire surface (new, renovated, or existing): shall be required if the surface is damaged by construction activities. The architect will make the final determination. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 15 and Section 16 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit. B. Paint shop primed equipment. C. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefuushed. D. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidently. E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, and grilles, to match face panels. F. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. PAINTING 09900 - 5 H. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify as required. I. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.6 CLEANING A. As work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of work, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.7 SCHEDULE OF PAINTING A. The kinds and brands of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be those listed below. The types of paint are identified with Pittsburg Paint or Sherwin Williams numbers. B. The owner and architect shall select color, tint, and sheen from manufacturer's standard color chart. B. Exterior and Interior Metal: 1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel C. Interior Wood: For paint finish 1. First Coat: PPG 6-6 Speedhide enamel undercoat 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-90 Series low sheen enamel D. Interior Wood: For transparent finish 1. First Coat: Rez 77 line semi -transparent stain 2. Second Coat: PPG Speedhide 6-10 sanding sealer 3. Third Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer 4. Fourth Coat: PPG Lo-sheen varnish or flat lacquer E. Gypsum Board Walls and Ceilings 1. First Coat: PPG 6-2 Speedhide drywall sealer 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-510 Speedhide acrylic latex enamel F. Galvanized Metal 1. First Coat: PPG 6-209 galvanized steel primer 2. Second Coat: PPG 6-252 Series Speedhide enamel 3. Third Coat: PPG 6-252 Speedhide enamel PAINTING 09900 - 6 G. Concrete and Asphalt Pavement 1. First Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, 1L Line yellow unless noted otherwise. 2. Second Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, accessible parking zones to recieve a second coat. H. Concrete Unit Masonry 1. First Coat: SW ProMar B25 Block Filler 2. Second Coat: SW A-100 Satin Latex A82 3. Third Coat: SW A-100 Satin Latex A82 I. Concrete Walks 1. First Coat: PPG Traffic & Zone Marking Paint, blue unless noted otherwise. Accessible ramps and sloped walks. END OF SECTION PAINTING 09900 - 7 SECTION 10675 METAL STORAGE SHELVING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. B. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall show plans, elevations, sections, details of construction, thicknesses of members, methods of fastening, details of hardware, such other information as necessary to fully describe the cabinets to be furnished and their installation into the work and specifications for the required finish. B. Samples: One complete cabinet unit shall be submitted for approval. After approval, the sample unit may be incorporated into the finished installation provided the unit is identified and its location noted. C. Test Results: Test results shall be provided indicating conformance to load and cycle tests. D. Color: Submit the manufacturer's standard color samples for selection by the architect. 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Store cabinets in dry, ventilated area and protect all finishes from soiling and damage during handling. B. Coordinate storage locations with other trades of this project and with the owner. 1.6 WARRANTY A. All materials shall be structurally sound and free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use for a period of one year after the date of delivery of the products. B. Provide fully executed manufacturer's standard written warranty to owner. 1.7 ALLOWANCE A. Provide a $10,000 storage cabinet allowance to the owner. The owner's representative shall have the option to select alternate cabinet components from those submitted. The owner shall make the final choices in the configuration of storage cabinets and all manufacturer's standard options. 1997 Green Harvey Architects, Inc. Unauthorized duplication prohibited. METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10675 -1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Stanley Storage Systems, 1-800-523-9462. B. Lista International Corporation, 1-508-429-1350. C. Penco Products Inc, 1-610-666-0500. 2.2 CONFIGURATION A. General dimensions, insofar as manufacturing tolerances and standard commercial sizes permit. Shall be in accordance with the following: Overall Width: 30 inches Overall Depth: 27 inches Overall Height: 36 inches (includes base) 2.3 MATERIALS A. Drawers: Runners and carriage brackets shall be rated for at least 400 pound capacity with a fail safe stop system capable of withstanding repeated use. Assemblies shall be rated for 3,000 cycles without failure at full load capacity and 12,000 cycles at half capacity. Drawers shall fully extend to 100 percent of the drawer housing, allowing full view of all contents. B. Labels: Each drawer front shall have a drawer pull and label system at least 20 inches long and be able to accept a 1 inch high label insert. Provide a label insert system with a clear protective plastic cover in a positive keeper. There are not to be any exposed sharp protrusions. C. Dividers: Drawers shall allow for multiple divider arrangements, dividers are to be of steel. D. Release: All cabinets shall have a mechanism to prevent more than one drawer to be opened at one time. System shall only allow one drawer to be open at a time. E. Locks: The owner shall select the number, location, and arrangement of any locks. Supplier shall assume that at least 75 percent of the total cabinets will be locked. F. Finish: All steel shall be primed and painted. All surfaces shall be treated with a phosphate bath and be sealed prior to painting. All none moving parts shall have a baked enamel finish. G. Color: Owner shall select color or colors for all cabinets. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cabinets, doors, drawers, and bases square, rigid and without warp, with finished faces flat and free of scratches and chips. B. Weld all joints and connections as standard with manufacturer. Limited bolted connections may be allowed after proper submittal, review, and approval by owner and architect. C. Ninety percent of the completed fabrication must take place prior to delivery to the job site. Limit on site fabrication to fmid assembly of pre -assembled components and final adjustments. METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10675 -2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets at the locations shown in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for a plumb, level, rigid, and flush installation. B. Conceal all fasteners wherever possible. Use suitable anchors to provide secure anchorage. C. Adjust doors, drawers, trays, and latches to operate easily without bind. D. Replace any defective doors or other components with matching components. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installations with corner guards, protective film, safety tape, etc. as may be required to prevent cabinets from being damaged. B. All damaged components shall be replaced with new components matching the installed unit. 3.3 OPERATION A. Provide owner's representative with demonstration of full cabinet operation and options. Answer any questions that the owner's representative may ask concerning the cabinet operation and maintenance. B. Provide owner with full maintenance and care instruction manuals. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove all package crates, tapes, fasteners, and shiping materials from the job site. B. Remove all protective material from the cabinets only after all work on this project is completed, but prior to final walk through and acceptance. END OF SECTION METAL STORAGE SHELVING 10675 -3 SECTION 15010 GENERAL PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all materials and labor as required for the installation of a plumbing, ventilation, and heating systems, all as shown on the drawings, as herein specified, or both. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements for work required under this section. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. This Contractor shall submit six (6) copies of all submittal data covering proposed equipment to the Architect for approval prior to installation. All equipment shall be submitted at one time in a bound folder with an index of submittal. 1.4 REGULATIONS A. All work shall be done in strict accordance and compliance with State and Local Laws, together with regulations of the particular Utility Companies concerned. B. Obtain permits as required by the local authorities. (No charge for permit, but Contractor shall secure permits.) 1.5 DRAWINGS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. Each Contractor shall check these drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings and/or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the Contract Documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete Contract. B. The plans accompanying these specifications are intended to show the general arrangement and the extent of the work contemplated. The exact location and arrangement of all parts shall be determined after equipment has been approved by the Architect and as directed by the Architect. All materials or labor necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these specifications shall be furnished by each Contractor without additional charge as if called for in these specifications or shown on the plans. C. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions, supports or clearances other than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such items GENERAL 15010-1 with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary because of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. D. This Contractor shall thoroughly lay out all his work and check all conditions to insure that the work as shown on the Drawings can be installed without modifications. No material shall be fabricated or delivered to the job until these conditions have been determined. E. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to make changes during construction, if required, and no allowances will be made for prefabricated material or on job materials which can not be used due to actual conditions. 1.6 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Where manufacturer's names are mentioned in these specifications, it has been done, in most cases, in order to establish a standard. Where the phrase "or equal', or its equivalent is used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment, the products of others than the particular manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable, if of suitable type and construction, but any substitution must be of quality as good as, or better than, the named article. Where the phrase "or equal' or its equivalent, is not used in connection with a particular item of material or equipment only the products of the manufacturers mentioned will be acceptable. B. If the Contractor elects to substitute other equipment or materials for that specifiedby name, he shall be fully responsible for all coordination with other trades involved. Any expense incurred because of modifications to accommodate larger sizes, larger electrical service, fuel piping requirements resulting from such substitution shall be borne by the Contractor substituting other equipment. C. Upon being awarded the Contract for the work under one of the following sections, the Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days, submit for approval a complete list of the materials which he proposes to use. The list shall give the manufacturer's names and designations corresponding to every item and where submitted materials are different from that specified by name, the submission shall be accompanied by a complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data and drawings, necessary to give full and complete details for the completed installation. D. Any item on this list which is rejected because of unsuitability or interior quality, must be replaced by an acceptable item within two (2) weeks following notification of the Contractor of such rejection. If no satisfactory material is submitted within two (2) weeks, then the Architect reserves the right to notify the Contractor as to the type and make of materials he will be required to furnish. Six (6) copies of the material and the equipment list shall be furnished by the Contractor in neat and firmly bound brochures for approval. 1.7 PRECEDENCE A. The work covered in this section shall have precedence over each other in accordance with the following sequence: 1. Soil and waste piping 2. Duct work 3. Cold and hot water piping 4. Electric wiring GENERAL 15010-2 1.8 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Bidders upon the work under these headings shall visit the site to satisfy themselves as to the nature and scope of the work to be done before submitting bids. B. Submission of a bid will be taken as evidence that examination of the site has been made and that all such conditions that will effect the work have been taken into consideration. C. Information given or not given on the plans shall not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility. 1.9 PROTECTION OF WORK AND MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall protect the work and all materials (whether incorporated in the building or not) and shall cover openings to protect the building from the weather. B. The Contractor shall provide protection of all work in progress and shall be responsible for all damage done to the Owner's property or to any adjacent properties during the construction. 1.10 COOPERATION A. Each contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor and all other contractors to properly coordinate their work, to avoid interference and delays, and arrange all parts of the work so as to harmonize in service and appearance with all other parts. 1.11 INTERFERENCES A. The plans are generally diagrammatic and the Contractor must harmonize the work of the different trades so that interference between piping, equipment, architectural and structural work will be avoided. All necessary offsets in piping, fittings, etc., required to properly install the work must be kept as close as possible to walls, ceiling, columns, etc., so as to take up the minimum amount of space, and all offsets, fittings, etc., required to accomplish it must be furnished and installed by the contractor without additional cost to the Owner. B. Exact locations of mechanical and electrical outlets or equipment may be varied a reasonable amount by the Architect before installation without additional cost to the Owner. C. All equipment and controls shall be so located and arrangedthat all parts will be available for proper maintenance. 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Each Contractor shall do all necessary cutting and patching of walls, floors, partitions, ceiling, pavements, etc., as required for the proper installation of his work under these contracts in a neat and workmanlike manner and as approved by the Architect. No structural member shall be cut by the Contractor without first obtaining written permission from the Architect. B. All drilling and patching for expansion bolts, hangers and other supports shall be done by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. C. Labor and materials required to replace or rebuild parts cut or injured shall be furnished at this Contractor's expense, subject to Architect's satisfaction and approval. GENERAL 15010-3 D. Each Contractor shall be responsible for damages to other Contractor's installations and equipment. 1.13 CONTINUATION OF OPERATIONS A. The Contractor shall realize that the existing adjacent buildings house a going institution and must remain in operation throughout the construction period. B. Any interruption in utilities shall be coordinated with the Architect a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and, if required, shall occur outside the normal operating hours of the building. C. Special care shall be taken while performing work in the existing portion of the buildings to assure neat appearances in those areas being used at all times during the business hours. All excess materials, tools, equipment and debris shall be removed and the area left clean at the end of each day. 1.14 DEMOLITION A. Each contractor shall remove those items shown on the plans to be removed for each respective trade. B. All items to be removed or discarded are property of the Owner and shall be stacked as directed by the Architect or Owner unless notified by the Architect to become property of the Contractor in which case all items shall be removed from the site. C. Contractor shall take care not to damage more of the existing facilities than is absolutely necessary. All concrete to be removed shall be cored or sawed to widths to allow the installation of pipes or conduits indicated and replaced by Contractor who occasions the work. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. Materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from any defects. Materials and equipment for which the Underwriters' Laboratories have established as standard, shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and shall bear their label. B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to the job and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of same. This will be provided until final acceptance of the job. C. Each Contractor shall provide protection against weather, so as to maintain all materials and equipment free from injury and damage. All new work likely to be damaged shall be covered during the day and at the end of each day. D. Each Contractor will furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools, appurtenances and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of this contract. E. The workmanship shall be in all respects, the highest grade and all construction in accordancewith the best practice of the trade. GENERAL 15010-4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SOUND ISOLATION A. To prevent sound transmission and vibration, all operating equipment shall be isolated from the building construction by means of mountings designed to obtain the highest efficiency of sound isolation. Isolator sizes and methods of installation shall be in accordance with the recommendations of Chapter 43 of the 1995 ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications." 3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of these specifications shall furnish and install all foundations and supports required by equipment included in his work. 3.3 FIRE PARTITIONS A. Any penetrations through a fire wall or floor shall have the ancillar space sealed with a fire retardant material such as Link -Seal or equal. 3.4 PAINTING A. No painting will be required under this section. 3.5 TESTING A. This contractor shall test all plumbing lines and equipment as described under "Testing" section of these specifications. 3.6 ELECTRICAL A. Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase and voltage as specified and shall be of type recommended by motor manufacturer for type of service involved. B. The Contractor furnishing the motor shall install it. The Contractor shall furnish such motor controls and starting equipment as specified or as required. The erection and connection of all switches, starting and control equipment, and the wiring of same, shall be done as required. Conduits from controllers to motors shall be flexible for not over three feet (3') and shall be attached to the terminal housing of the motor. All flexible conduit to motor shall be waterproof type with neoprene jacket. 3.7 PIPE SLEEVES A. Each contractor shall provide sleeves for service lines passing through walls, roof or floors, subject to Architect's approval and/or as shown on the Drawings. Pipes passing through interior wall sleeves shall be free to move through sleeve. Sleeves exposed to view shall be equipped with cast brass escutcheons. B. All sleeves installed in vertical position shall be constructed of standard weight galvanized steel pipe. All sleeves in horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel or extra heavy cast iron pipe unless otherwise noted, welded to steel plate in vertical position as detailed on the drawings. Pipe sleeve diameter shall be a minimum of 2 diameters larger than the outside of pipe GENERAL 15010-5 passing through same, and a minimum of 1" larger than pipe plus insulation. Insulation shall pass through sleeves. 3.8 INSULATION A. Furnish and install pipe, duct, and equipment insulation as specified under "Insulation" section of these specifications. 3.9 EQUAL MATERIAL CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 3.10 INSTRUCTION MANUALS A. Furnish four (4) complete bound copies of Instruction Manuals on all operating equipment to Owner. Manuals: complete with repair instructions, replacement parts list, and complete operating instructions and wiring diagrams. 3.11 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. After completion of the work but before final payment is made, the Contractor shall run test over a sufficient period of time to prove the proper capacity and performance of apparatus, etc., and of system as a whole to the approval of the Architect and Engineer. See Testing section of the Specifications. 3.12 GUARANTEE A. This Contractor shall guarantee the workmanship and material against defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance, unless specified otherwise in other sections of this specification. END OF SECTION GENERAL 15010-6 SECTION 15020 TESTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Provide specified testing and testing as required by governing authorities. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable, clauses and regulations for other requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit a certificate signed by the job superintendent certifying that all tests have been satisfactorily completed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS A. All testing required under the contract of the plumbing contractor or heating and ventilating and air conditioning contractor shall be approved by the Engineer before acceptance. Provide the necessary valves for cutting off emsting work not to be tested. B. The contractor shall perform the various tests as specified and as required by State and Local Authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. C. Any leaks or defective material found shall be repaired and replaced, and tests shall be repeated until no further leaks or defects are indicated. END OF SECTION TESTING 15020-1 SECTION 15250 INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This contract includes furnishing and installing all insulation specified herein. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND DUCT INSULATION A. All insulation required under the Plumbing contract and Heating and Air Conditioning Contract shall be equal to and as manufactured by Knauf Fiber Glass, or Johns -Manville, and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. B. Insulation: 1. Condensate Drain Lines and Refrigerant Lines - Shall be insulated with Johns -Manville Aerotube, 1/2" thick, or approved equal. Secure joints with #57 adhesive. 2. Overhead Heating and Air Conditioning Sheet Metal Ducts - Shall be insulated with 2" fiber glass duct wrap with aluminum foil Kraft vapor barrier, and shall be secured to ductwork with an approved adhesive and be sealed and stapled in place, 1-1/2 lb. density. 3. Pipe Fittings - Insulate pipe fittings with pre -molded PVC fittings according to manufacturer's recommendation. 4. Contractor at his option may use interior duct liner in lieu of exterior insulation. Duct liner shall be Certainteed #150 Ultralite Duct Liner, or approved equal, 1-1/2 lb. per cubic ft. density with vinyl spray one side. All transverse joints shall be protected against air erosion by properly sealing all edges and securing with sheet metal clips. Duct liner shall be secured with mastic, 100% coverage and clips 18" on center. C. Where insulation is indicated to be applied inside of ducts, exterior insulation will not be required. D. Where insulation occurs inside of ducts, allowance shall be made in sheet metal ductwork to accommodate a total thickness of two inches. 2.2 EQUAL MATERIALS CONSIDERATION A. Approval of equipment other than that specified does not relieve the Contractor from the INSULATION 15250-1 I I responsibility of modifying the equipment if necessary to meet Structural, Architectural, Electrical, or Mechanical conditions as detailed and specified on the drawings. 2.3 SMOKE AND FLAME SPREAD r A. All duct and pipe insulation shall have a flame spread no greater than 25 and a smoke developed rating no greater than 50. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSULATION A. All insulation shall be applied to clean surfaces and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION INSULATION 15250-2 SECTION 15650 AIR CONDITIONING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Contractor shall furnish and install where shown on the drawings, complete Summer -Winter, indoor and outdoor air conditioning systems as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. 1.4 REBATES AND INCENTIVES A. Any and all rebates or incentives offered by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall go directly to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings a Trane combination electric heat pump blower and DX coil assembly. Unit shall be furnished with filter, evaporator, blower motor and electric heater of size and capacity as shown on the drawings. B. Unit shall be completepackage unit with all necessary controls, relays, contractors, etc., required for safety and proper operation. Electric heating section shall be of size and capacity as shown on the drawings. C. Unit shall have adjustable speed direct drive blower, filter rack and throwaway filters. Furnish 100% spare filters. Unit shall set on V thick cork. D. Refrigeration system shall be a pad mounted air cooled condenser heat pump unit of size and capacity as shown on the drawings. Unit shall be voltage and phase as shown on the drawings. Mount unit on roof on 4" X 4" redwood runner mopped into roofing. Runners shall span across a minimum of 2 roof joists. Compressor shall be equipped with a heater. E. Unit shall be tested and rated in accordancewith ARI Standard 210-64. Provide outdoor thermostats as required for proper and safe operation. F. Temperature controls shall be the sole responsibility of the manufacture of the mechanical equipment AIR CONDITIONING 15650-1 and will be furnished and installed by this Contractor. All wiring shall be by the Electrical Contractor. See Temperature Control Section for proper sequence of all controls. 2.2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A. Basic Unit Control System: 1. Each unit shall be furnished with a heating -cooling thermostat with locking covers and sub- base switches as follows: a. System off - auto - heat - cool. b. Fan- on - auto. 2. Each unit shall be equipped with a positive fan start device on a call for heat. 3. The condensing units shall be furnished with time off cycle devices to prevent short cycling of the compressors. They shall also have high -low pressure cutouts, 3 leg overload protection and internal thermostats in the compressor to limit winding and discharge temperature to safe limits. 4. Refrigerant control shall be by thermostatic expansion valves. 5. Units shall have an outdoor thermostat, field adjustable to change from gas heating to heat pump cycle heating. 6. In addition to the above, contactors, relays and safety devices necessary for a complete operational system shall be furnished. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of work the Contractor shall balance the system so that the quantity and proper velocity of air is delivered at each outlet uniformly as indicated on the drawings to within ten percent (10%). Necessary adjustment shall be made to the system to produce these quantities of air, and to eliminate any objectional drafts or noise which might exist. Contractor shall perform all air balancing in the presence of the Architect's Field Representative. B. When balancing has been completed, the Contractor shall provide the Architect with all necessary data, readings, and velocities at each outlet to substantiate that the systems are balanced and providing the necessary quantities of air as shown on the drawings. C. If the Architect deems it necessary, the Contractor shall rebalance air units and correct conditions to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. END OF SECTION AIR CONDITIONING 15650-2 SECTION 15840 DUCTWORK PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishings of all material and labor as required for the installation of a complete duct system, as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW VELOCITY - LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. All ductwork shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings, shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished airtight joints. The ducts shall be installed as to be completely free of vibration. Metal duct slip joints shall be made with an inside radius of not less than the width of the duct, except that Factory Fabricated Air Turns shall be used where a sharper turn must be made or where otherwise indicated on the drawings. All takeoffs to registers shall be made with Factory Fabricated Deflectrols, or approved equal, and all major branches where noted on the plans shall have splitters with an accessible operating handle and locking device, Young Model No. 917 right angle gear and No. 1 ceiling regulator, or approved equal. B. All ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized iron sheets fabricated and installed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for Low Velocity Systems. C. Air turns shall be as manufactured by Barber -Colman, or approved equal. No job -built turning vanes will be used on this job. Where insulation is applied inside of ducts, turning vanes shall be installed inside of insulation. D. After all ducts are installed, all dirt and debris shall be removed from inside of ducts. E. Ductwork for round ducts shall conform to the latest edition ASHRAE guide. F. All duct construction seam corners and connections shall be sealed with white "Permagum Slugs" as manufactured by Virginia Chemicals, Inc. G. All ductwork shall be made airtight and reinforced as required for pressures as shown on the drawings. DUCTWORK 15840-1 r H. All dimensions indicated shall be sheet metal dimensions. Allowance shall be made for internal insulation as it occurs, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. All duct systems shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and shall provide a complete and working system. 3.2 CLEANING A. After installation is complete, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Damaged paint shall be sanded and touched -up. END OF SECTION DUCTWORK 15840-2 SECTION 15870 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specification includes the furnishing of all labor and materials as required for the installation of a complete air diffusing system as shown on the drawings, and as hereinafter specified. All side wall grilles, supply and returns, shall comply with NFPA Standard No. 90A. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Refer to other applicable clauses and regulations for other requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. All submittal required by this section shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0 13 00. B. Submit manufacturer's data for approval on all materials to be furnished as part of this project. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 FINISHES A. Ceiling supply diffusers shall be baked off-white enamel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. This Contractor shall install all grilles and registers in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. END OF SECTION GRILLES, REGISTERS AND CEILING DIFFUSERS 15870-1 SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. B. Furnish all labor, materials, service, equipment and appliances required to complete the installation of the complete electrical system in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings. C. Electrical Division Index: 16010 - General Electrical Provisions 16110 - Raceways 16120 - Conductors 16130 - Boxes and Fittings 16140 - Wiring Devices 16170 - Switches and Fuses 16500 - Lighting 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. This Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete all electrical and related work as shown on the drawings and/or herein specified as follows: 1. Installation of secondary services as shown on the drawings. 2. From starting point install and connect all panelboards, meters, power outlets, convenience outlets, switches, lighting fixtures, and controls. 3. Conduits, junction boxes, wall outlets for telephone and data system. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATOR AGENCIES AND STANDARDS A. Regulatory Agencies: Installations, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), and the terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work required. All modifications required by these codes, rules, regulations and authorities shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge to the Owner. B. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): All materials, appliances, equipment or devices shall conform to the applicable standards of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. The label of, or listing by, UL is required. C. Standards: Where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, the publications and standards of the following organizations shall apply: American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material List: As soon as possible after contract award and before material is ordered, the Contractor shall submit for approval a list of all proposed material and equipment, indicating manufacturer's name and general description. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval in accordance with the requirements contained in the SPECIAL PROVISIONS, a minimum of six (6) copies of all shop drawings after the material list has been approved and prior to ordering. Show complete outlines, dimensions, electrical services, control diagrams, electrical characteristics of special nature or critical to the installation, and pertinent data required for installation. Indicate in the transmittal that submittal has been reviewed and accepted and all contract deviations identified. In addition to, but not limited to, specific references or requests, submit shop drawings for the following applicable items: Switchboards, Panelboards, Lighting Fixtures, Transformers, Alarm Systems, Primary Cable, Emergency Battery Units, Fire Alarm. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make all adjustments to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer. B. Where no specific material, apparatus, or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets the approval of the Engineer. C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design. D. Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily the function intended at an altitude of the project site. E. Materials and Equipment shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements specified below. Other materials and equipment shall be as specified elsewhere herein and as shown on the drawings, and shall be the products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in a first class GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-2 workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment or material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Thoroughly test all fixtures, services, and all circuits for proper operating condition and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances, and devices shall be operated under load conditions. B. After the interior -wiring system installation is complete and at such time as the Engineer may direct, conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices, and equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications. C. Prior to acceptance or beneficial occupancy, establish nominal building power loads and record voltage readings at all panelboards. Based on these readings make final adjustments of tap changers on all transformers in the building electrical system to comply with specifications and equipment installed. D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to prove acceptability. E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. The Exchange will furnish the necessary electric power. 3.3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. Instructions: Without additional charge to the Owner, furnish competent instruction to the Engineer in the care, adjustment and operation of all parts of the electrical equipment and systems. B. Manuals: Upon completion of the work, prepare and deliver to the Architect two (2) sets of complete operating and maintenance manuals for the systems and major equipment installed. Include catalog data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves and rating data, spare parts lists, and manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. C. Other: The above requirements are in addition to specific instructions and manuals specified for individual systems or equipment. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. Mark each individual motor controller, disconnect switch, transformer, and remote control device to identify each item with its respective service. Marking may be stencilled on the enclosure or adjacent surface in utility areas. Provide nameplates in finished area. B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8 inch high where specified or noted. In general, use white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. Embossed plastic adhesive tape is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have identification engraved in the device plate. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-3 C. Identify panelboards, motor control centers, switchboards, and cabinets by nameplates with descriptions indicated on the drawings together with indication of location of the feeder overcurrent protection. Install on inside of hinged doors of panelboards and cabinets. 3.5 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner and shall present a neat and mechanical appearance upon completion. All mechanics shall be capable experienced electricians. B. Panels and cutout boxes shall be properly supported from the building construction. Boxes shall be set plumb and at height best suited for adequate operation. Wiring troughs and barriers shall be as required by the National Electric Code as amended to date. C. Symbols on drawings are approximately correct, but care shall be taken that all fixture outlets are symmetrical on spaces, ceiling panels, bays or rooms, and all switch outlets are on the strike side of doors. D. Outlets may be varied slightly in location either horizontally or vertically by the Owner before installation. Outlets for special equipment shall be located and verified on the job before final rough -in is made. E. Unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed, locate outlet boxes as follows: (Dimensions are from bottom of box to floor.) Switches 4'-0" Convenience Outlets 1'4" or as noted Telephone Outlets 1'4' or as noted Thermostats 4'-0" or as noted Panelboards 6'-0" from top to floor Power Outlets 1'4' or as noted F. All work shall be concealed, and panels, boxes, etc., shall be flush type, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. All conduits and wiring shall be run from overhead unless otherwise noted. If walls do not extend to ceilings, run conduit in slabs. Conduit in shop areas may be run exposed, threaded thru roof joist. G. All flush outlet boxes shall be set so that edge of cover comes flush with finished surface. Outlet boxes shall be of a suitable size and construction to serve the purpose properly. H. There shall be no more knockouts opened in any outlet box than are actually required. Outlet boxes shall be provided in all cases with proper supports for fixtures. All wires shall be polarized. No joints or taps in feeders will be permitted under any condition. K. Joints in branch circuits shall occur only where such circuits divide, and shall then consist of one (1) through circuit, to which shall be spliced the branch from this circuit. L. Wire and cable connectors shall be solderless, mechanical type. Connectors for conductors #8 AWG and smaller shall be Buchanan Electrical Products copper squeeze -on type with molded rubber or vinyl cap, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co. Scotchlock, or Ideal Industries Super -Nut spring connector with molded vinyl cap. GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-4 M. Conduits shall be of such size and shall be so installed that the required conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive stain. Powdered soapstone only may be used as a lubricant where necessary. Sizes of conduits shall be in accordance with National Code tables. Flexible metal conduit may be used for final connections to motors, etc., but shall not be over 48" in total length from outlet box to motor. Waterproof flexible conduit may be used in exterior locations. Connectors for conductors larger than #8 AWG shall be mechanical bolted type, insulated with clamp -on molded covers or vinyl plastic tape. The manufacturer shall be O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Co., or Burndy Engineering Company. Flexible conduit smaller than 1/2" diameter shall not be permitted to be used. N. Where conduits enter boxes they shall be secured in place by galvanized lockouts and bushings. Conduit ends shall be carefully plugged during construction. O. Conduits, except those which are vertical for their entire length, and except conduits connecting ceiling outlets together, shall have a drag consisting of a number of tight fitting rubber washers drawn through before wires are pulled in. END OF SECTION GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS 16010-5 SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. General Provision of the Contract, including General Conditions, Special Conditions, and Division 1 General Requirements apply. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, lightweight steel zinc-coatedon the outside and either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion- resistant coating on the inside. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Mild steel, zinc -coated on the outside and either zinc -coated or coated with an approved corrosion -resistant coating on the inside. D. Flexible Conduit: Commercial Greenfield, galvanized steel, with a separate grounding bond wire installed in the conduit in addition to other wires. No flexible conduit shall be installed over 2' in length. E. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel tubing with extruded liquid -tight PVC outer jacket and a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. Where a separate grounding conductor is installed in the conduit, bonding conductor in the conductor in the convolutions may be omitted. F. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size 1/2 inch except where specifically approved for equipment connections. Sizes shall be as noted on the drawings and where not noted sizes shall be as required by the NEC. 2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit, IMC, and EMT Fittings: Iron or steel only. Cast fittings will not be allowed. B. Flexible Conduit Fittings (Commercial Greenfield): Either steel or malleable iron only, with insulated throats, and shall be of one of the following types: 1. Wedge and screw type with angular wedge fitting between the convolutions of the conduit. RACEWAYS 16110-1 Squeeze or clamp type with bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit and clamped by one or more screws. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit convolutions. C. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Gland shall be either steel or malleable iron only with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without "O" ring seal. Each connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected. D. Connectors and Couplings: Compression type threadless fittings for rigid steel conduit or M4C permitted. Set screw type fittings for rigid aluminum conduit not permitted. Steel set screw connectors and couplings permitted for special conditions when approved. EMT couplings and connectors either steel or malleable iron only, "Concrete -tight" or "Rain -tight", and either the gland and ring compression type or the stainless steel multiple point locking type. Connectors to have insulated throats. EMT fittings using set screws or indentations of a means of attachment not permitted. E. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, M4C, and rigid aluminum conduit larger than 1/2 inch size. F. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings shall be hot -dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring. G. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits and threaded cast aluminum type for aluminum conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Conduit Systems: Rigid steel conduit, M4C, or EMT unless otherwise specified. Aluminum conduit is not permitted. B. EMT: Not permitted underground nor embedded in concrete. C. Flexible Conduits: Use flexible conduit for lights, motor or equipment connections and then only to the extent of minimum lengths required for connections. Install flexible conduit connections at all resilient -mounted equipment. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit in exterior, wet or damp locations and for connections to wet -pipe mechanical systems. All flexible conduit in kitchen, food preparation, walk-ins, and dishwashing locations shall be liquid -tight. D. Exposed Conduits: Install exposed conduit systems parallel to or at right angles to the lines of the building. Right angle bends in exposed runs shall be made with standard elbows, screw jointed conduit fittings or conduit bent to radii not less than those of standard elbows. RACEWAYS 16110-2 E. Concealed Conduits: Install conduit systems concealed where possible unless otherwise noted. Conduit systems may be exposed in unfinished utility areas, ceiling cavities, and where specifically approved by the Engineer. Install concealed conduit systems in as direct lines as possible. F. Conduit Bends: In any conduit or EMT run the number of quarter bends or equivalent between terminations at cabinets or boxes shall not exceed four (4) bends for conduits up to 1-1/4 inch, three (3) bends for 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 inch conduits, and two (2) bends for 3- to 4-inch conduits. Conduits run between cabinets or boxes shall not exceed 100 feet for straight runs nor 100 feet for runs with maximum number of bends. Bends in telephone feeder conduits shall be long -radius. G. Conduit Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits or EMT terminating in the bottoms of boxes or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to installation of conductors. H. Sealing Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, and where otherwise indicated. I. Sleeves for Conduit: Install sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit sleeves not used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduit passing through walls. Sleeves that are used shall be caulked tight with lead yarn. 3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT as required by the National Electrical Code, including runs above suspended ceilings. In suspended ceiling construction, only lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. No supports shall be permitted from metal roof decks. B. Straps: Install one -hole pipe straps on conduits 1-1/2 inch or smaller. Install individual pipe hangers for conduits larger than 1-1/2 inch. Spring steel fasteners with hanger rods may be used in dry locations in lieu of pipe straps. C. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers where two or more horizontal conduits or EMT run parallel and at the same elevation. Secure each conduit or EMT to the horizontal hanger member by a U-bolt, one -hole strap or other specially designed and approved fastener. D. Hanger Rods: Install 3/16 inch diameter or larger steel rods for trapezes, spring steel fasteners, clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be used for the support of any conduit, EMT or light fixtures in open ceiling areas. E. Fastening: Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or expansion bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by means of toggle bolts. Wooden plugs and shields shall not be used. Power -driven fasteners may be used to attach pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete where approved by the Engineer. F. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be firmly secured by means of pipe clamps, hangers, etc., equal to Caddy Fasteners of ERICO Products, Inc. Wire wrapped around conduits and supporting members will not be acceptable. 3,3 IDENTIFICATION A. Contractor shall furnish as -built drawings showing routing and/or terminations of all conduit and boxes run into floor and from underfloor into wall or above ceiling terminations. RACEWAYS 16110-3 3.4 CLOSING OF OPENINGS A. Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in floors or walls for the passage of conduits or other forms of raceway, including bus ducts, such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such openings, shall be filled or closed in a manner approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION RACEWAYS 16110-4 SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS) lA. Conform to the applicable UL and IPCEA Standards for the use intended. Copper conductors with 600 volt insulation. Stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger. Aluminum conductors shall rnot be permitted. l B. Insulation: Type THHN insulation minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Type THHN minimum filled cross -linked polyethylene 90 deg. C thermosetting insulation for conductors No. 8 or larger. 90 deg. C minimum insulation within fixture wireways of fluorescent fixtures, Type RF-2 or TF commercial fixture wire, No. 16 AWG may be used for Class 2 remote control and signal circuits. CC. Size: No. 12 AWG minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. Not less than NEC requirements for the system to be installed. Conductors for trench circuits of 120 volts, or more than 100 feet long from panel to load center, shall be No. 10 AWG. Class 1 remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control l and signal circuit conductors shall be not less than No. 16 AWG. If Contractor furnishes other than specified equipment, it shall be his responsibility to furnish proper size conduit and conductors as j required without additional cost to the Owner. D. Conductors shall be color coded as follows: 120/208V Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral White Ground Green Connect all conductors of the same color to the same phase conductor. Conductors No. 12 and 10 shall be solid color compound for the entire length. Conductor sizes larger than No. 10 may be color coded at each termination and in each box or enclosure with 6 inches of half -lapped 3/4 inch pressure -sensitive, plastic tape of respective colors in lieu of solid color compound. CONDUCTORS 16120-1 2.2 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS A. Split wedge type supports which clamp each individual conductor and tightens due to weight of the cable shall be used for cables without metallic sheath. Basket weave type supports shall be used for cables with metallic sheath. 2.3 CONNECTORS AND LUGS A. For Copper Conductors No. 6 and smaller: 3M Scotch-Lok or T&B Sta-Kon compression or indent type connectors with integral or separate insulating caps. B. For Copper Conductors Larger than No. 6: Solderless, indent, hex screw, or bolt -type pressure connectors, properly taped or insulated. 2.4 TAPE A. Plastic tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms minimum insulation resistance, oil -resistant vinyl backing, oil -resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of supporting combustion per ASTM D-568 Test Method B. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRE AND CABLE TESTS (600 VOLTS) A. Measure the insulating resistance of service entrance conductors, feeder circuit conductors, and service ground. Measurements shall be taken between conductors and between conductors and ground. Resistance shall be 1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without branch circuit loads. Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the Engineer, and shall be in accordance with the applicable IPCEA Standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in presence of the Engineer. Submit written reports of the tests and results shall be furnished to the Engineer. 3.2 SPLICES (600 VOLTS AND UNDER) A. Permitted only at outlets or accessible enclosures. Conductor lengths shall be continuous from termination to termination without splices unless approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION CONDUCTORS 16120-2 SECTION 16130 BOXES AND FITTINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Construction: Zinc -coated or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes of a class to satisfy the condition at each outlet except where unilet or condulet bodies are required. Knockout type with knockouts removed only where necessaryto accommodatethe conduit entering. Square cornered, straight sided gang boxes, 4 inch octagon concrete rings and 4 inch octagon hung ceiling boxes with bars may be folded type; one-piece deep -drawn type for all other boxes. B. Size: To accommodate the required number and sizes of conduits, wires and splices in accordance with NEC requirements, but not smaller than size shown or specified. Standard concrete type boxes not to exceed 6 inches deep except where necessary to permit entrance of conduits into sides of boxes without interference with reinforcing bars. Special purpose boxes shall be sized for the device or application intended. C. Fixture Studs: 3/8 inch malleable -iron fixture stud in outlet boxes for ceiling lighting fixtures and interior bracket lighting fixtures, other than lamp receptacles and drop cards. D. Exposed: Screw joint type, with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations exposed to the weather. E. Tile Boxes: Rectangular in shape with square corners and straight sides for receptacles and switches mounted in furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick stone or wood walls. Install without plaster rings. F. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Boxes: Unless otherwise noted or specified, not less than 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep for signal devices, 4-11/16 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep for two devices and multigang boxes for more than two devices. Boxes for switches and receptacles on unfinished walls may be screw joint type with covers to fit the devices. G. Light Fixture Boxes: 4 inch diameter by 1-1/2 inch deep minimum for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with concealed conduits. Plaster covers for bracket fixtures to have 3 inch diameter openings. Screw joint boxes with canopy seat for ceiling and interior bracket fixtures with exposed conduits. H. Grounding Terminal: Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green equipment BOXES AND FITTINGS 16130-1 ground conductor, for serving motors, lighting fixtures, or receptacles. Grounding terminal shall be green -colored washer -in -hand machine screw or grounding bushing. 2.2 PULL BOXES A. Minimum NEC requirements unless larger box is noted. Pull boxes with internal volume not more than 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for outlet boxes with blank covers. Pull boxes with internal volume over 150 cubic inches shall be as specified for cabinets except covers shall be same thickness as box and shall have corrosion -resistant screws or bolt attachments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 OUTLET BOXES A. Installation: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, outlet boxes shall be flush mounted and the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers shall be flush with the finished wall or ceiling line, or, if installed in walls and ceilings of incombustible construction, not more than 1/4 inch back of same. Mount boxes with the long axes of devices vertical, unless otherwise specified. Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings shall be provided with plaster covers. A multiple of box extensions and/or covers will not be permitted. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with suitable metal bar hangers, box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood, expansion shields on masonry and machine screws on steel work. B. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall -mounted outlet box shall be construed to mean the height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. On exposed tile, block, or brick construction mount outlet boxes at the nearest bed joint in the mounting height indicated. Verify with Architect. C. Wall -Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., mount so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. Install outlet boxes near doors or windows close to the trim. Install outlet boxes near the doors on the lock sides as shown on architectural drawings, unless other locations are approved by the Architect. 3.2 PULL BOXES A. Provide additional pull boxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for maximum lengths of conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under Conduit and Fittings. 3.3 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS A. Recessed or surface light fixtures in lay -in or accessible ceilings shall be connected with minimum 1/2 inch flexible metallic conduit, 4 to 6 feet long, with grounding provided. Flexible conduit shall not be used as the ground. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all exposed junction and pull boxes according to the system and voltage carried by means of painted -on stencils or labels, with legible letters and contrasting colors and without abbreviations. In general, use yellow color. Painting shall be in accordance with Division 9 - Finishes. END OF SECTION BOXES AND FITTINGS 16130-2 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. B. Color: All wiring devices shall be ivory with stainless steel coverplates unless otherwise noted on the drawings. All wiring devices shall be Leviton Decora Plus series or equal. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 SNAP SWITCHES A. Unless otherwise specified, each snap switch (flush tumbler -toggle) shall be of the A.C. general use type for mounting in a single -gang spacing, fully rated 20 amperes minimum on inductive and resistive loads at 120/277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., UL 20 Fifth Edition Standard snap Switches and further requirements herein specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single -pole, 3-way or 4-way, of the maintained, momentary, or lock type as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall operate in any position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with entire body of molded phenolic, urea or melamine with cover of molded phenolic, urea or melamine. Fibre, paper or similar insulating material shall not be used for body or cover. Ivory color handles unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Silver or silver alloy contacts. A.C. 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of withstanding tests as outlined in NEMA Publication WD1-1965, and shall be as follows unless otherwise noted: 20A 120/277 AC Leviton 1P 5621-2I 2P 5622-2I 3-way 5623-21 4-way 5624-2I Dimmers 80800-LI 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in accordance with NEMA Publication WD1-1965, Part 3 and Part 10, and the Texas Department of Human Services Minimum Standards for Day Care Centers, Section 4300, Number 1, Part A. Fire-resistant, non -absorptive, hot -welded, phenolic composition or equal bodies and bases with metal plaster ears (integral with the supporting member). Single or duplex as shown or noted on drawings. Ivory color unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong. WIRING DEVICES 16140-1 B. Grounding Type: All receptacle shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal equipment ground screw of adequate size to accommodate an insulated grounding jumper (based on Table 250-95 of the NEC with minimum size No. 14 AWG). Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall be internally connected to the receptacle mounting yoke. C. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles shall be as follows: 20A - 125V AC 2P 3W Leviton 16362-HGI D. Weatherproof receptacles shall consist of duplex receptacle as specified above, mounted in a box with a gasketed, weatherproof, cast metal cover plate and cap over each receptacle opening. The cap shall be permanently attached to the cover plate by a short length of bead chain or shall be of the spring hinged flap type. E. Isolated grounding receptacles shall be the same NEMA configuration as 20A 125 volt receptacle except that the grounding pole shall be isolated from the mounting strap and be colored orange similar to Leviton 16362-IGI. Ground these devices by means of a separate green equipment grounding conductor. F. Special: Receptacles for special applications shall be as indicated on the drawings. For kitchen equipment furnished under another section of the specifications, complete with cord set. This Contractor shall verify exact requirements and furnish a matching receptacle where indicated. G. All 220V receptacles in areas within children's reach shall have safety covers. 2.3 EXTERNAL LIGHTING AND POWER CONTROLS A. Photo Cells: Intermatic K1800 series or equal. 2.4 PLUG CAPS A. Except for duplex receptacles, one matching plug cap shall be provided for each receptacle. No plug caps are required for duplex receptacles. Provide watertight, male plug caps in damp locations or where exposed to weather. 2.5 DEVICE PLATES A. General: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and telephone outlet, and special purpose outlet. Provide multi -gang outlet plates for multi -gang boxes. Screws shall be metal with countersunk heads, in a color to match the finish of the plate. B. Exposed: Plates for exposed screw jointed fittings shall match the fittings with edges of plates flush with edges of fittings. Heavy cadmium plated steel with gasket. Plates for cast type boxes at locations subject to wet or rain conditions shall be of the cast, vapor -tight type. Provide hinged lift covers for devices. C. Communication: Plates for telephone and intercommunication have a 1/2 inch bushed opening in the center. D. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular application. WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DEVICE PLATES A. Install with alignment tolerance of 1/16th inch and all edges in continuous contact with wall surfaces. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 16140-3 I FSECTION 16170 SWITCHES AND FUSES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 PART PRODUCTS 2.1 HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. 30 to 1200 Amperes 250 Volts Ac, Dc; 600 Volts Ac 2, 3 Poles Fusible and Non -Fusible Copper Terminals Enclosures NEMA 1 General Purpose NEMA 3R Raintight B. Furnish and install where indicated heavy duty type safety switches having the electrical L characteristics, ratings and modifications shown on the drawings. C. All switches shall have: NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless otherwise noted; metal nameplates, front cover mounted, that contain a permanent record on switch type, catalog number and Hp ratings (with both standard and time delay fuses); handle whose position is easily recognizable and is padlockable in the "OFF" position; visible blades; reinforced fuse clips; nonteasible, positive, quick make -quick break mechanisms; and switch assembly plus operating handle as an integral part of the enclosure base. 2.2 FUSES A. General: Dual element, time delay type, based on heavy service, Buss Fusetron or equal. B. Current Limiting Fuses: Provide where indicated on the drawings. Feeder protection in conjunction with fused switches, install NEMA Class L fuses sized 125% of load current or as required for coordination. Current limiting high -interrupting capacity fuses coordinated with molded case circuit breakers shall be furnished by the circuit breaker manufacturer. C. Coordination: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide basic selective protection and properly coordinate with the other associated protective equipment. D. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer. SWITCHES AND FUSES 16170-1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DISCONNECTING MEANS A. Install in each location indicated on the drawings. 3,2 SPARE FUSES A. Furnish one complete set of each size of current limiting fuse other than Fusetron, each size of current limiting fuse installed for circuit breaker protection, and each size Fusetron fuse in excess of 30 amperes. Also one spare set of each size high voltage fuses installed. END OF SECTION SWITCHES AND FUSES 16170-2 SECTION 16500 LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS A Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions and General Requirements. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. General Electrical Provisions - Section 16010 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval complete shop drawings, catalog cuts, special installation instructions, photometric data, and descriptive literature. When fixtures are proposed for substitution and prior approval has not been issued, the submittal for approval shall include catalog cuts of both the specified and proposed fixtures. Catalog numbers shown on the Fixture Schedule are indicative of the general type desired and are not intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable if approved by the Engineer. All fluorescent fixtures shall be of the type approved by Underwriters' Laboratories. B. A prior approval will be required on proposed substitutions within five (5) calendardays of bid date. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Furnish all lighting fixtures throughout of the type indicated on the drawings, complete with lamps, sockets, wiring, fitters, hangers, plaster rings, etc., as required. 2.2 LAMPS A. Fluorescent: F32/T8/SP41 unless otherwise noted. B. Incandescent: 130 volt MR16-75W unless otherwise noted. C. H.I.D.: Clear unless noted, Type 'T 'self -extinguishing. Universal burning lamps will not be accepted. D. Manufacturers: General Electric, Phillips or Sylvania. 2.3 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent: UL approved, high power factor with ETL certified CBM label, suitable for 120V operation as required. Sound rating of "A" for interior installations. Provide premium Class P protected ballasts with built-in thermally actuated automatic reclosing device. Manufacturers shall LIGHTING 16500-1 certify in writing that the ballast hot spot shall not exceed 90 deg. F. ambient temperature. Ballasts shall be electronic type. Provide two (2) bolt attachment of ballasts. B. Manufacturers: Advance Mark III, General Electric MaxiMiser I. 2.4 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. All fixtures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all sections of the channel structure shall be securely held in position. Fixtures shall not be mounted in such a way that ballast hum will be amplified or transmitted into work areas. B. Fluorescent fixtures indicated to have dual switching shall have the inboard lamps connected to one ballast and the outboard lamps connected to the other ballast. 2.5 FINISH A. Bonderized or equal treatment on all steel parts prior to applying finish. Metal parts shall be aluminum, brass, copper, bronze, or steel, with powder coat, post -fabrication baked white enamel finish unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDERS A. Designed so lamps will be held firmly in place, electrically and mechanically, permitting easy insertion or removal of lamps. Provide corrosion resistant treated lamp pin contacts. 2.7 CEILING TRIM A. Furnish proper ceiling frames for ceiling material in which recessed fixtures are to be installed. Verify prior to ordering. 2.8 LENS A. When an acrylic lens or diffuser is specified, it shall be of 100% acrylic meeting American Society for Testing Materials specifications for Methacrylate Molding and Extrusion Compounds (ASTM D788-63). Plastic diffusing panels, luminous sides panels and other luminous plastic members of fixtures shall be made of not less than 0.156 inch thick prismatic Pattern 19 clear acrylic material. Plastic shall be non-flammable or shall have a flame spread rate of not more than 3.2 inches per minute for a 1/2 inch width of the material. The plastic shall show no yellowing apparent to the naked eye either when subjected to the accelerated weathering test in accordance with ASTM D-795-44T (500 hours exposure, using type S-1 lamp) or after prolonged exposure to a fluorescent lamp source under conditions identical with those existing in the fixture in which it is to be used. The plastic shall be non -electrostatic or the finished parts shall be treated with an anti -static wax. 2.9 HOUSING A. Not less than 20 gauge steel with baked white enamel finish applied over corrosion -resistant primer unless otherwise specifically approved. LIGHTING 16500-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUPPORTS A. Support ceiling fixtures by anchorage to the ceiling only where the ceiling is concrete or masonry units. Provide mounting angles on trapeze where required to support light fixtures between structural members. No lighting fixtures, conduit or outlet boxes shall be supported from the building sheet metal deck. Where lay -in construction is used, fixtures shall be on the lay -in type. Coordinate supports for lay -in fixtures with Ceiling Contractor. 3.2 LOW DENSITY CEILING A. Special attention is directed to the code restriction against mounting fluorescent fixtures on combustible low -density cellulose fiberboard (NEC 410-76(6)). If fixtures are to be installed that are not UL approved for this condition, a suitable mounting arrangement shall be developed which meets the approval of the Engineer. 3.3 CEILING TRIM AND MEANS OF SUPPORT A. The ceiling trim and means of support of recessed fixtures shall be coordinated with the type of ceiling to be installed to insure proper installation. 3.4 BLOCKING A. Protect housings of recessed lighting fixtures during installation of internal blocking or framing to prevent distortion of sides or dislocation of threaded lugs which upon completion must be in perfect alignment and match the corresponding holes in frames or rims so that holding screws can be installed freely without forcing and remain so they can be easily removed when servicing. Threads to receive holding screws shall be chased after plating and finishing to insure easy installation and removal of knurled beaded screws by thumb pressure. 3.5 LAMP GUARDS A. Provide safety guard clips on open type fluorescent fixtures to prevent lamps from falling. 3.6 CLEAN-UP A. At final inspection, the fixtures and lighting equipment shall be in first class operating order, in perfect condition as to finish, free from defects, completely lamped, clean and free from dust, plaster or paint spots, and complete with the required glassware, reflectors, side panels, louvers or other components necessary to complete the fixtures. A. Install new lamps in all lighting fixtures seven (7) days before building acceptance or beneficial occupancy, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION LIGHTING 16500-3